.WAFL (l=?&r0`Kh3Fhf@!0CƜ.ntry(H b* How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Digital Portal - Online Documents

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Introduction
Links Overview
Documents
Bibliography
Book Reviews
Newsletter
Feedback


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Digital Documents


Cyberspace and the American Dream: A Magna Carta for the Knowledge Age

By Esther Dyson, George Gilder, George Keyworth and Alvin Toffler, 1994

This libertarian statement represents the cumulative wisdom and innovation of many dozens of people. It is based primarily on the thoughts of four co-authors: Esther Dyson, George Gilder, George Keyworth and Alvin Toffler. It exists in several releases, for it is a 'living' document, and it illustrates the American belief in the virtues of the digital networks.

TOP


Remarks on the Global Information Infrastructure

By US Vice President Al Gore, International Telecommunications Union, March 1994

TOP


Europe and the Global Information Society: Recommendations to the European Council - Bangemann Report

By the European Commission, Brussels 1994

TOP


Economic FAQs about the Internet

By Jeffrey K. MacKie-Mason and Hal R. Varian, 1995

Mackie-Mason and Varian cover the economic, institutional and technological structure of the Internet as well as some speculation on the future of the Internet. Questions and answers range from as simple as "What does 'speed' mean?" to as complex as "What non-price mechanisms can be used for congestion control?" One of the best available introductions to the Internet and Internet economics, this chapter includes a useful reference list as well.

TOP


Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace

By John Perry Barlow, EFF, Feb 1996

TOP


Green Paper - Living and working in the Information Society - People First

By the European Commission, July 1996

TOP


Economic Consequences of the Internet

By Dr. Edward Yardeni, Chief Economist Deutsche Morgan Grenfell, October 22, 1996

Yardeni analyses in a short report the economic consequences of the Internet. In his mind they could be extraordinary. Inflation could drop to zero, global auction markets will emerge, consumers of tomorrow can easily and quickly find the lowest price for any good or service.

TOP


Preparing Canada for a Digital World

By The Information Highway Advisory Council to the Canadian Government, 1996

The report sets out recommendations for an Information Highway strategy for Canada.

TOP


A brief history of the Internet

By ISOC, 1997

This is an extensive history of the Internet written by some of its own pioneers. The authors conclude with some speculations as to where the Internet is headed.

TOP


Computerized Technology and Human Responsibility - Frequently Asked Questions

By Stephen L. Talbott, Netfuture, January 30, 1997

TOP


Electronic Commerce - OECD Policy Brief 1/1997

By the OECD, 1997

TOP


Digital tornado: The Internet and telecommunications policy

By the FCC, March 1997

This FCC staff working paper written by Kevin Werbach, Counsel for New Technology Policy, is one of the most current and useful references available on the questions the Internet poses for traditional communications policy.

TOP


The Long Boom: A History of the Future, 1980-2020

By Peter Schwartz and Peter Leyden, Wired magazine, July 1997

TOP


The Social and Labour Market Dimension of the Information Society, People First - The Next Steps

By the European Commission, July 1997

TOP


The HomeNet Project - Research Reports

By Robert Kraut, Carnegie Mellon University, August 1997

HomeNet is a Carnegie Mellon research project studying what people do with the Internet and how it affects their lives. Made up of over 100 Pittsburgh households representing a wide range of demographics, the HomeNet project provides participants with computer equipment, subsidized access to the Internet and training in using both their computers and the Internet. Through detailed, ongoing questionnaires and electronic data collection, Internet usage and its effects on participants' lives can be studied and analyzed in detail.

TOP


Survey Telecommunications: A connected world

By The Economist, September 1997

TOP


New Rules for the New Economy - Twelve dependable principles for thriving in a turbulent world

By Kevin Kelly, Wired September 1997

TOP


Attention Shoppers!

By Michael H. Goldhaber, Wired magazine, Dec 1997

TOP


The Attention Economy: The Natural Economy of the Net

By Michael H. Goldhaber, 1997

TOP


Internet Economics: An Annotated Bibliography

By Dr. Bruce C. Klopfenstein, 1997

TOP


Long Boom or Slow Bust? The FEED Dialog on the New Economy

By Steve Gibson, Doug Henwood, Mark Stahlman, William Taylor, FEED, December 1997

TOP


The Digital Age driven by the passion of Intel's Andrew Grove

By Walter Isaacson, Time Magazine, December 1997 / January 1998

TOP


Informations Technology Outlook 1997

By the OECD, Paris 1997

The report, prepared by the OECD Secretariat under the guidance of the OECD's Committee for Information, is the fourth in a biennial series designed to provide member governments with analysis of trends in the information technology industry and the impact of information technology on the economy.

TOP


Business-to-Consumer Electronic Commerce - Survey of Status and Issues

By the OECD, Paris 1997

Electronic commerce between businesses and consumers is rapidly developing into a major economic activity. It may create new market opportunities not only in information and communications industries but in almost all industries involving commercial transactions with consumers. However, this raises many questions about existing forms of economic activity. In the light of rapid developments in technology and industry activities in the private sector, various groups of experts are currently discussing a number of issues concerning electronic commerce. This paper seeks to survey and analyze the issues in various areas of electronic commerce between businesses and consumers.

TOP


The European Information Society at the Crossroads

FAIR Annual Report, 1997

The central concern of 1997 FAIR Report (funded in the context of the ACTS program of the EU) is that the pace of ICT technical innovation in the supply structure and the implementation of a regulatory framework moving towards increased competition and liberalisation are proceeding more rapidly than other necessary social and economic changes.

TOP


The Californian Ideology

By Richard Barbrook and Andy Cameron

There is an emerging global orthodoxy concerning the relation between society, technology and politics. Barbrook and Cameron call this orthodoxy the Californian Ideology in honor of the state where it originated. By naturalising and giving a technological proof to a political philosophy, and therefore foreclosing on alternative futures, the Californian ideologues are able to assert that social and political debates about the future have now become meaningless and unfashionable. The paper - devised at the Hypermedia Research Centre - argues for a more interactive future.

TOP


Technorealism

By the Berkman Center for Internet & Society, 1998

The authors state that over the past few years, as the debate over technology has been dominated by the louder voices at the extremes, a new, more balanced consensus has quietly taken shape. The document seeks to articulate some of the shared beliefs behind that new consensus, which the authors have come to call technorealism.

TOP


Encyclopedia of the New Economy

By John Browning and Spencer Reiss, Wired 1998

To help inform the architects of this new world, Wired and Andersen Consulting have assembled this Encyclopedia of the New Economy.

TOP


Knowledge Management, Research Report 1998

By KPMG Management Consulting, 1998

There is little doubt that we have entered the knowledge economy where what organisations know is becoming more important than the traditional sources of economic power - capital, land, plant and labour - which they command. Knowledge management is the trendy discipline of capturing the knowledge-based competencies, storing and disseminating them for the benefit of the organisation as a whole. The KPMG report tries to find out what is happening in the business world. It provides useful concepts which can also be adpated to other sectors in the society.

TOP


The Emerging Digital Economy

By the US Departement of Commerce, 1998

The report discusses the potential impacts of the information technology on the economy. It provides useful data on investments, productivity, products and prices in order to develop new indicators which determine how IT changes the economy. It discusses the pros and cons of a potential 'long boom.'

TOP


Towards 'digital intermediation' in the European information society

By Richard Hawkins, Robin Mansell, and W. Edward Steinmueller, Science Policy Research Unit (SPRU) of the University of Sussex, June 1998

A very good paper on digital communitites and its intermediaries.

TOP


Death of Distance

By Francis Cairncross, 1998

Read "The Trendspotter’s Guide to New Communications: How will the death of distance shape the future?" which is a forecast about the important developments to watch. It is an extract from the new book by Francis Cairncross on the impact of digitalization on business, every-day-life and politics.

TOP


President's Information Technology Advisory Committee: Interim Report to the President

By the National Coordination Office for Computing, Information, and Communications of the US, August 1998

A report released by the US President’s Information Technology Advisory Committee, whose membership includes many of the nation’s top computing and communications experts, sets out a bold agenda for ensuring America’s leadership in the Information Age by expanding government investments in long-term research and development in technologies such as computers, networks, and software.

TOP


1998 Digital State

By the Progress and Freedom Foundation, 1998

Executive summary about how state governments are using digital technology.

TOP


The Economic and Social Impact of Electronic Commerce: Preliminary Findings and Research Agenda

By the OECD, 1998

TOP


How eCommerce Could Impact Europe's Future

A report by Andersen Consulting, 1998

TOP



Networked Computing for the 21st Century

A report by the US National Science and Technology Council, Committee on Technology, Subcommittee on Computing, Information, and Communications R&D, August 1998

TOP


Job opportunities in the Information Society: Exploiting the Potential of the Information revolution

By the European Commission, November 1998

The report by the European Commission highlights the fact that an acute shortage of skills and an unwillingness to invest in start-up firms are shackling the EU's information technology industry and letting half a million potential jobs go to waste.

TOP


Report of Ireland's Advisory Committee on Telecommunications

November 1998

A group of American Internet experts has suggested in a report that Ireland, host to many U.S. computer companies' European headquarters and major manufacturing facilities such as Microsoft and Intel, could easily catch up to the United States and lead Europe as an e-commerce superpower.

TOP


The Hi-Tech Gift Economy

By Richard Barbrook of the HRC, published in First Monday, December 1998

Barbrook argues that the 'New Economy' of cyberspace is an advanced form of social democracy.

TOP


The Emerging Digital Economy II

Report of the US Commerce Department, June 1999

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

posthf@XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate Hhf@Lh+{9z3ntry(]Jf=R shLk{url 4http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e0010-4b70-37d9860c"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


The Project How We Want to Live Tomorrow and the Hoechst Triangle Forum set up by the Center for Applied Policy Research and the Hoechst Foundation initiates an intercultural dialogue on challenges of the future, and options and strategies for steering global change towards a sustainable world.


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Book Review:

Information.Macht.Krieg
Ars Electronica 98

Ars Electronica
TOP



September 8-10, 1999

HOECHST TRIANGLE FORUM

Welcome EveningThe Hoechst Triangle Forum, a high-level conference with participants from North America, Asia and Europe, addressed our ability to build a common, sustainable future. We discussed prospects, priorities and specific measures for governmental and other leaders to take to reach our goals.

Listen to the Welcome Presentations:

Jürgen Dormann, CEO Hoechst AG
Werner Weidenfeld, Director of the CAP

Find more presentations here.

The Event

Mission
Program
Participants
Discussion Paper
Hoechst Castle, 9-8-99, 4 pm
Click here for a larger version of the Höchst Castle, the conference venue in Frankfurt.
Internet Coverage
You will also find photos and news reports on the website of the Hoechst Foundation.

TOP







New Economy Portal
August 16, 1999
New Economy Portal
Decision Makers 2010
May 10-12, 1999
Decision Makers 2010
Outlining the Future
March 23, 1999
Outlining the Future
Biotech Portal
January 13, 1999
Biotech Portal
Digital Portal
October 20, 1998
Digital Portal
Digitalization
July 13, 1998
Brainstorming: Digitalization
Brainstorming
May 1998
Brainstorming: Genetic Technology
Agenda Conference March 1998
Trilateral Agenda Conference:
How Do We Want to Live Tomorrow?


TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate {6+LkKpntry(SJS"jT,V)=@OLUurl How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Project Profile

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Focus
Goals and Structure
Results
Partners
Contact Us

Back to Project Background


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Focus

Global ChangeThe pace of global change is accelerating: New technologies, globalizing economies, demographic shifts, social mobility, migration, and global communication networks add up to a new quality and density of interpenetration and interdependence. As a result, the global social, cultural, and ecological environment will also change at a dynamic pace. Social systems are entering into a new phase of interaction and competition without losing their distinctiveness. World politics and world trade are being complemented by the emerging notion of a global village - however fragile and ambiguous that may be. While elites have begun to integrate across national or continental frontiers, the identity of most citizens continues to be defined in national, regional or local terms. Equally, globalization is not unrivaled, it is being opposed by decentralization and regionalization, and also by the threat of disintegration and fragmentation.
Thus, the key parameters of social existence will change and current social institutions and patterns of social order will have to be rebuilt or adapted. Collective choices and preferences that are nurtured and protected within these frameworks will have to be replaced or shifted to new institutional settings. The attempt to steer these processes of change and build sustainable international structures is without alternative. Though of relevance in most parts of the globe, the level of affectedness, the awareness of the implications of global change, and the readiness to play an active role in change management are most pronounced in the three industrial centers of today's world: North America, Europe and Asia-Pacific. Here lie the sources of many of the issues on the future global agenda as well as the potential and resources needed to resolve them. Together, these three regions have the critical mass required to steer change and they offer the highest concentration of expertise and management potential.

TOP


Goals and Structure

The Project 'How We Want to Live Tomorrow' and the 'Hoechst Triangle Forum' are designed to initiate and develop an intercontinental and intercultural dialogue on global change, challenges of the future, and options and strategies for steering global change towards a sustainable world. By bringing together interdisciplinary expertise and ideas from North America, Europe and Asia-Pacific, it will seek to reconcile differences in defining patterns of social order, value systems, culture, and civilization so as to promote a new generation of answers to the issues of change. The project will attract high-profile personalities from the worlds of business, politics, society (i.e. culture, the arts, religion, philosophy, history) and the media. The findings of the project´s meetings and studies will be used to provide impetus to the debates in the Americas, Europe and Asia. At the heart of the project is the Hoechst Triangle Forum, an annual meeting of around 30 personalities who will discuss the issues and studies presented to them. Meetings will rotate between locations in the three regions, beginning with the first forum in Germany in the fall of 1999.
Each forum will be prepared by Input Task Forces which will collect expertise from the three regions with regard to specific topics. The task forces will prepare the input for the annual forums by setting up project groups, holding regional conferences or conducting independent studies. Their results will serve as a platform for the Triangle Forum.

TOP


Results

The results of each forum will be communicated in the form of memoranda which will present the outcome of the discussions. The impetus memoranda will be made available to business, political, and social elites and to the general public in North America, Europe and Asia.
Communication, information, and feedback concerning the project will largely be Internet-based. The e-mail newsletter global_futures keeps readers up to date in the project. Additionally, it provides tips on projects, publications, and other information that provide special insight into the dynamics shaping our common future. Furthermore the so-called portals to the future will help visitors to conduct research on the Web. The Center for Applied Policy Research will continue to build up this project Web site giving access to the memoranda and materials and allowing a global dialogue on the project's agenda. Special sections will be created for expert communication. The results, proposals and recommendations of the project will also be made available in printed form.

TOP


Partners

The project is being conducted by the Center for Applied Policy Research (CAP), a leading German think tank on international affairs based at Munich University , and the Hoechst Foundation established by Hoechst AG , a global leader in life sciences and industrial chemistry. Click here for further information on the project partners.

TOP


Contact Us

For further Information please contact
Jürgen Turek (CAP)
Tel. +49-89-4904290
Fax. +49-89-49042929
E-Mail
Note also the Contact Us section.

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post,VXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate S,Vȳ埴+LUKRntry(?DRۊHyU~Gʲ$u `url http://www.uni-muenchen.de/mime text/htmlhntt"802f6e992efbe1:493e"hvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body> </body> postyUXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ?yUr"+6ntry(}$3}>|2GmvQkyurl 4http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/skyline.htmmime text/htmlhntt"80b02ce08ef0be1:493e"hvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen
post|2XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate |2 A+ntry(b]jXV&4)Svy{|H>21uurl 1http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/home.htmmime text/htmlhntt"80ea6cc35f9be1:493e"hvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen

Geschichte, Zahlen und Fakten, Organisation, Lagepläne, Anreise

Willkommen
Die Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München begrüßt Sie mit ihrem
Web-Angebot


Personenverzeichnis, Termine, Gelbe Seiten, Index, Sitemap

Verwaltung, Fakultäten, Institute, Bibliotheken, Datenverarbeitung

 High Tech Campus LMU: Neubauten fr Chemie und Pharmazie
Neubauten für Chemie und Pharmazie

 

Sonderforschungsbereiche, Graduiertenkollegs, Wissens- und Technologietransfer, Forschungsförderung

Auslandsamt, Studiengänge, Studienberatung, Studentenwerk (Wohnen, Mensa, BAföG), Prüfungsordnungen
Das LMU-Intranet (derzeit nur fr LMU-Entwickler) Das LMU-Intranet (derzeit nur fr LMU-Entwickler)
Persönliche Informationen, Mailbox, Diskussionsforum, Chat


Diese Webseiten sind optimiert für Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x und Netscape Communicator 4.x bei einer minimalen Auflösung von 800x600 Pixeln

postSXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate bSɴ+1<ntry(؅ s2^xV|YRϺoR|udurl >http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=lmumime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> postYXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ؅ Y8#+ntry(!1G l{wI+{ElU8!)`Fuurl 1http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/head.htmmime text/htmlhntt"082944d6e18be1:493e"hvrsdata Head - LMU
Zurck zur LMU Hauptseite
post+{EXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate !1G+{E;+FQntry(Mv{ Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> postӲ^XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate Mv{<Ӳ^?>+ntry(?{36?U(X?Ȗeү}̣/fL> durl >http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/menue.cfm?bereich=lmumime text/htmlhvrsdata Menü - Startseite
Aktuelle Informationen Informationen ber die LMU Wissenschaftliche Einrichtungen Informationen rund ums Studium Forschung und Wissenschaft Suchen und Fragen Das LMU-Intranet (derzeit nur für LMU-Entwickler)
postү}XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ?{36ү}C+ ntry(CEOIrF3qAnzurl Thttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/nav.cfm?pos_1=0&pos_2=0&pos_3=0&bereich=lmumime text/htmlhvrsdata LMU-Navigation
Lageplan Lageplan
Universittsleitung Universittsleitung
Verwaltung Verwaltung
Geschichte der LMU Geschichte der LMU
Hochschulrat Hochschulrat
Rechtliche Grundlagen Rechtliche Grundlagen
Wo finde ich was? Wo finde ich was?
Zahlen und Fakten Zahlen und Fakten
postXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate CEN+ntry(d jy * K:\lmu\uni\rektor.htm
Grußwort des Rektors

Sehr geehrte Damen und Herren,
liebe Schülerinnen und Schüler!

Herzlich willkommen auf der Homepage der Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München!

Ich freue mich über Ihr Interesse an unserer Universität. An ihr sind jetzt rund 44.000 Studenten in 19 verschiedenen Fakultäten eingeschrieben. Sie werden bei uns von nahezu 800 Professorinnen und Professoren und 3000 wissenschaftlichen Mitarbeitern betreut. Etwa 10.000 weitere Mitarbeiter bilden das Service-Team für Forschung, Lehre und Krankenversorgung im Universitätsklinikum der LMU.

Die Universität München bietet zur Zeit 170 Studiengänge an, von der Theologie über die Rechts- und Wirtschaftswissenschaften, die Medizinischen Fächer, die Psychologie und Pädagogik, die Sozialwissenschaften, die Geschichtswissenschaften, die Sprach- und Literaturwissenschaften, sowie die Mathematik bis zu den Naturwissenschaften. Auf dem HighTechCampusLMU Martinsried -Großhadern führen wir Schritt für Schritt unsere biomedizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Fächer zusammen. Im Westen Münchens entsteht damit ein europaweit einmaliges Zentrum für Biotechnologie. Wir pflegen bewußt diese große Bandbreite wissenschaftlicher Disziplinen, darunter auch seltene "Orchideenfächer" wie orthodoxe Theologie, Albanologie, Ägyptologie oder Assyriologie. Die Universität München ist stolz auf diese Fächervielfalt, mit der sie in Deutschland einzig dasteht.

Daß neben der Betreuung unserer Studenten auch die Forschung nicht vernachlässigt wird, beweisen 14 von der DFG eingerichtete Sonderforschungsbereiche, 11 Graduiertenkollegs, sieben DFG-Forschergruppen und die Beteiligung an neun Bayerischen Forschungsverbünden. Knapp 4.700 Studenten erwerben Jahr für Jahr bei uns einen ersten berufsqualifizierenden Abschluß. Hinzu kommen rund 1.400 Promotionen und gut 110 Habilitationen. Die Universität entläßt also einen breiten Strom von Absolventen in das Berufsleben. Mit Erfolg bemühen wir uns, für Studierende, Nachwuchwissenschaftler und Dozenten aus dem Ausland attraktiv zu sein. In der Gunst der Forschungsstipendiaten der Alexander-von-Humboldt-Stiftung liegt die LMU bundesweit sogar auf Platz eins. Mit dem Studium an der Universität München haben unsere Absolventen ein Gütesiegel erworben, das für Ihre Zukunft von großem Wert ist. Sie sind herzlich eingeladen, diesem Beispiel zu folgen.

Professor Dr. Andreas Heldrich
Rektor der Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München
e-mail: rektorat@verwaltung.uni-muenchen.de

post *XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate *b (l9AҐ5\furl @http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=suchemime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> post>(l9XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate OD%>(l9u+ntry(Wb˝XR)Q}uq m[_eurl ?http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/body.cfm?bereich=suchemime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> postR)XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate WR)x+*ntry(Zx|yW: dx furl @http://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/menue.cfm?bereich=suchemime text/htmlhvrsdata Menü - Startseite
Aktuelle Informationen Informationen ber die LMU Wissenschaftliche Einrichtungen Informationen rund ums Studium Forschung und Wissenschaft Suchen und Fragen Das LMU-Intranet (derzeit nur für LMU-Entwickler)
postyW:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate yW:}g+ ntry(]3:r+ʧNߋ^Q@'"|url Vhttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/nav.cfm?pos_1=0&pos_2=0&pos_3=0&bereich=suchemime text/htmlhvrsdata LMU-Navigation
Anfragen an die LMU Anfragen an die LMU
Suchfunktion Suchfunktion
Wo finde ich was? Wo finde ich was?
postߋXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ]ߋr+ntry(x-gC$1y 'u.ZAKnurl Hhttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=einrichtungenmime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> post1yXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate x1y+#ntry(>s(B.8nyqHe5Vb jurl Dhttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=aktuellesmime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> post8nyXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate >8ny= +  ntry(ں`yM;i,79#7 (~`,lfurl #http://www.chemie.uni-muenchen.de/mime text/htmlhntt"1811-2b86-37df4e48"hvrsdata Chemie und Pharmazie LMU München
Fakultät 18 Chemie und Pharmazie München

Fakultt 18

Einrichtungen
Telefon (nur Intranet)
Departments
Chemie und Pharmazie
Studium Cicum Sicherheit

Lageplan
(53KB)
 


Samstag, 25. Sept. 1999

Tag der offenen Tür

im neuen High-Tech-Campus München-Großhadern
zwischen Würmtalstraße und Klinikum
U6 Hst. Großhadern Bus 266 oder 268 Hst. Waldhüterstr.

Brauchen wir Chemie und Pharmazie überhaupt ?

Wir informieren Sie über
die Bedeutung der Chemie, Pharmazie und Gentechnik im täglichen Leben
zeitgemäße, naturwissenschaftliche Forschungsarbeit
die Ausbildung der Chemiker und Pharmazeuten
Besuchen Sie uns im neuen High-Tech-Campus in Großhadern

Info-Stände der studentischen Fachschaften der Chemie und Pharmazie
Studienberatung Chemie und Pharmazie

Für Ihr leibliches Wohl sorgt die Cafeteria

Programm

Einführungs-Vorträge mit Diskussion Liebig-Hörsaal Haus F

13.00
Begrüßung durch den Dekan der Fakultät
Prof. Dr. H. Mayr
 
 
 
13.10
Experimental-Vorlesung Farbe in der Chemie
Prof. Dr. W. Beck
 
 
 
14.00
Laserspektroskopie und optische Manipulation einzelner Moleküle
Prof. Dr. C. Bräuchle
 
 
 
15.00
Gentechnik und Genom-Forschung
Gewagte Lebendigkeit - Lebendigkeit wagen
Dr. H. Ibelgaufts

Führungen, Laborversuche 10 - 17 Uhr

Chemie

Chemie-Didaktik: Arbeitsplatz und Arbeitsmittel eines Chemielehrers
(Dr. M. Anton)

Arbeiten mit empfindlichen Substanzen
(Prof. Dr. W. Beck, Prof. Dr. T. M. Klapötke)

Chemie in Käfigen: Katalyse und Sensorik
(Prof. Dr. T. Bein)

Laser in der Chemie
(Prof. Dr. C. Bräuchle)

Chemie wie bei McDonalds
(Prof. Dr. P. Knochel)

Umwelt und Katalyse
(Prof. Dr. H. Knözinger)

Farben und Farbstoffe
Von der Ästhetik zur Funktionalität
(Prof. Dr. H. Langhals)

Systematisierung chemischer Reaktionen
(Prof. Dr. H. Mayr)

Röntgenstrukturanalyse von Molekülen
(Prof. Dr. H. Nöth, Prof. Dr. P. Klüfers)

Ein einfacher Toxizitätstest
(Prof. Dr. H. R. Pfaendler)

Hochtemperatur-Hochdruck-Synthesen und
Röntgenstrukturanalyse neuer Materialien
(Prof. Dr. W. Schnick)

Pilzinhaltsstoffe
(Prof. Dr. W. Steglich)

Kernmagnetische Resonanz-
Spektroskopie, Labortechniken
(Dr. W. Storch)

Wasserstoff, Sauerstoff und Stickstoff und deren Verbindungen
(Prof. Dr. M. Westerhausen)

Die arme Poctin unter dem roten Schirm
Extreme Schutzgastechnik in der Clusterchemie
(Prof. Dr. N. Wiberg )

Computer-Chemie
(Prof. Dr. H. Zipse)

Pharmazie

Pharmazeutisch-chemische Forschung
(Prof. Dr. F. Bracher)

Aspirin, Opium oder Pfefferminz. Who is who?
(Prof. Dr. E. Reimann)

Entwicklung und Herstellung moderner Arzneiformen
(Prof. Dr. K. Thoma, Prof. Dr. G. Winter)

Arzneipflanzen, Drogeninhaltsstoffe
(Prof. Dr. A. Vollmar)

ZNS-Pharmaka, Arzneimittel-Analytik
(Prof. Dr. K. Wanner)

Genzentrum

Vorstellung des Genzentrums
(Prof. Dr. R. Grosschedl, Prof. Dr. E. Wolf)

Fadenziehendes Leben So macht man DNA
(Dr. H. Blum)

Spezialvorträge zu aktuellen Themen:
Transgene Mäuse  - Knock-outs
Gentherapie  - Genprothesen
Erbkrankheiten  - Proteomics
Immunsystem  - Prionen
Viren und Antiviren -  Protein-Faltung
Molekulare Tierzucht
Molekulare Ursachen von Alzheimer
Papierbleiche mit Pilz-Enzymen



Fakultät für Chemie und Pharmazie Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität
Butenandtstr. 5-13, D 81377 München
Redaktion: Dr. H. Ibelgaufts, Dr. W. Storch, Dr. H-U. Wagner
Stand: 14.09.99
post,79#XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ں,79#ȴ+#,l+ntry(w;'&v  ;&-0 jurl Dhttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=forschungmime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> post&-XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate w;&-Ċ$+$ ntry(a '1'6Aym1ȍK]+hurl Bhttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=studiummime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> postAyXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate a 'Ay%+%ntry(.\Z}{wlAǠM!3u֥y5iurl Chttp://www.uni-muenchen.de/lmu-00000000/index.cfm?bereich=intranetmime text/htmlhvrsdata Ludwig-Maximilians-Universitt Mnchen <body bgcolor="#FFFFFF"> </body> postǠMXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate .\ǠMp'+'ntry(:{LI0L=)P.gQm{{[url http://www.hoechst.de/mime text/htmlhntt"2eb80-1236-3736c181"hvrsdata Hoechst Internet Forum
 
Welcome to Hoechst. Our site is optimized for 4.X Internet Browsers.
If the automatic forwarding function does not work with your Browser, please click here.

.

postP.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate :{LP.\r+-6ntry(MwbPPc?syZh?~2@url Ahttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e04e2-3fb6-37d9863b"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Mission

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Mission

Listen to the Welcome Presentations:

Jürgen Dormann, CEO Hoechst AG
Werner Weidenfeld, Director of the CAP


Shlomo Avineri, Jürgen Dormann, Benjamin BarberThe Hoechst Triangle Forum is a high-level meeting of decision makers, scientists and artists from North America, Asia and Europe to address questions of global change. It is part of the project How We Want to Live Tomorrow which was jointly set up by the Hoechst Foundation and the Center for Applied Policy Research.

Castle HöchstIn 1999, through three structured discussions, the Hoechst Triangle Forum addressed our ability to build a common, sustainable future. The results of five Input Task Forces and a discussion paper serve as an analytical framework and a starting point for the participants. As a follow-up, we expect to make known priorities and specific measures for governmental and other leaders to take to reach our goals.

First Panel Program: In the first discussion, we addressed the challenges to governance posed by global changes at the end of the twentieth century. In the second, we set our sights on how the digital and biotech revolutions are likely to change developed societies. In the third panel, we discussed concrete measures that leaders can take to help reach a more desirable future. We have put a number of questions to the participants to give the debate additional structure:


Common Currents of Power? The Future of Societies and Governance in the US, Europe and Asia

  • What are the critical challenges facing governance in advanced industrialized societies?
  • What are the key rules of the game in future societies, and which actors shape them?
  • Who are the likely winners and losers, and why?

Shaping Future Societies: Globalization, Digitalization and Biotechnologization
  • What parts of life will be changed most by the new technologies?
  • What social problems or conflicts will advancing technologies provoke?
  • What can a technologically transformed society offer as solutions?
  • How does globalization affect these technological dimensions?

Responsibilities for the Future
  • What concrete measures do we need to take now in order to reach the
    future that we desire?
  • How can we organize social and generational contracts in a transformed
    society?
From these questions, and from the dialogue that follows, the Hoechst Triangle Forum will help point the way to a sustainable future. We invite you to take part in the discussions through our online forum.

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post?sXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate M?s`6+9@?ntry(gv$^z\)*ܓ袂HgDurl Hhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/webcam/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e0594-43c7-37d986cd"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Mission

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Webcam Gallery

Find a comprehensive picture gallery
on the website of the Hoechst Foundation.



Wednesday, 9-8-99



Castle Höchst

Castle Höchst



Lounge

Future Exhibition
PCs
Future Exhibition



Welcome Aperitif

Participants
Participants
Participants
Participants



Garden

Garden Statue



Welcome Diner

Welcome Diner



Thursday, 9-9-99



Introduction

Link to Mr Dormann's Real Audio Presentation
Link to Prof. Weidenfeld's Real Audio Presentation



First Panel

Boris Y. Nemtsov
Link to Benjamin Barber's Presentation
Ronnie Chan



Second Panel

Link to Michio Kaku's Presentation
Ernst-Ludwig Winnacker



Art by Jörg Frank





Friday, 9-10-99



William Drake
Zulkifli Bin Baharudin
Maritta Koch-Weser


TOP




Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postܓXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate gvܓ#7M+<DCntry(hynHeqC<%h ]Ѹ}hwY:url Khttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/dormann/dormann.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e05e2-398c-37d8e31b"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Presentation by Jrgen Dormann

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Welcome Presentation by
Jürgen Dormann


Jürgen Dormann

Click here to start the Real Audio File (9:05 min.)

(Installation Guide)


Welcome Speech

In his welcoming address, the Hoechst CEO Jürgen Dorman discussed the reasons the Hoechst Foundation called the Hoechst Triangle Forum into being. He said that Hoechst is at the center of several processes and developments which will have a major influence on the future of the world. One of the world's main challenges in the future, he said, will be to develop an environmentally sustainable means of producing enough food. Aventis, the planned merger between Hoechst and Rhone-Poulenc, with its capabilities in key technologies and knowledge of global life sciences markets, can make key contributions to this objective. Mr. Dorman said the Triangle Forum was established so that tomorrow's thinkers and active members of society, both in cultural and scientific areas, can enter into a dialog about future issues.

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

posthXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate hyhh̳+W:9ntry([dl>"FN#K-ˢ֊ q:url Lhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/weidenfeld/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e05e4-3990-37d8e1dd"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Presentation by Werner Weidenfeld

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Welcome Presentation and Introduction
by Prof. Dr. Werner Weidenfeld


Werner Weidenfeld

Click here to start the Real Audio file (15:12 min)

(Installation Guide)


Aims of the Forum

Werner Weidenfeld, director of the Center for Applied Policy Research, who organized the conference, talked about the aims of the Triangle Forum. He said the main objectives were: 1) to find out what factors will shape society in the foreseeable future: 2 ) to address the driving forces of change; and 3) to come up with adequate strategies to cope with the changes. Mr. Weidenfeld said that the Triangle Forum was unique because representatives from three continents - Asia, American, and Europe - were taking part. He went on to discuss the main points of the discussion paper handed out to participants before the conference. The paper addressed such issues as globalization versus regionalization, and erosion of national states vs. internationalism, among other things. Weidenfeld said the conference was "just one segment in a permanent working process."

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate [dlKֳ]+`:9ntry(mbX7"M\ zm;n>A(hTQ9GCurl Chttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/program.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e04ea-4639-37ddfadc"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Program

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Program

Links lead to summaries of presentations and real audio files.


September 8


Informal Welcoming Dinner


Webcam Section
Wiliam Drake, Jörg Frank und Moira Gunn.


September 9


Welcoming and Introduction


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Mr. Jürgen Dormann
Chief Executive Officer, Hoechst AG
Chairman of the Board of Trustees, Hoechst Foundation
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Prof. Dr. Werner Weidenfeld
Director, Center for Applied Policy Research (CAP)
Munich
Real Audio Presentation


Common Currents of Power? The Future of Societies and Governance in the US, Europe and Asia


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Hon. Boris Y. Nemtsov
Former Governor
Nizhni Novgorod
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Prof. Dr. Benjamin Barber
Director, Walt Whitman Center, Rutgers University
New Brunswick, New Jersey
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Mr. Ronnie Chan
Chairman of the Board, Hang Lung Development Co.Ltd.
Hong Kong
Real Audio Presentation


Shaping Future Societies: Globalization, Digitalization and Biotechnologization


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Prof. Dr. Michio Kaku
City College of the City University of New York
New York
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Prof. Dr. Ernst-Ludwig Winnacker
President, German Research Society
Bonn
Real Audio Presentation


Meeting the Art of the Trilateral Dialogue


Mind Your Step
Mr. Jörg Frank
Cologne

Art by Jörg Frank

Short Program
Ensemble Modern


September 10


Responsibility for the Future


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Dr. William Drake
Senior Associate, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Washington, DC
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Mr. Zulkifli Bin Baharudin
Nominated Member of Parliament
Singapore
Real Audio Presentation


Summary and Real Audio Presentation
Dr. Maritta Koch-Weser
General Director, World Conservation Union
Geneva
Real Audio Presentation


Conclusion - Key Issues and Recommendations


TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postzm;nXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate mbXzm;n\+jGCF9ntry( 9?G: zf~q\C=DUqGMurl @http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/part.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e04e8-4ca4-37d7ee69"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999 - Participants

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Participants

Prof. Dr. Shlomo Avineri
Professor of Political Science, Hebrew University, Former Director General, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Israel

Mr. Zulkifli Bin Baharudin
Nominated Member of Parliament, Vice President, Circle International, Singapore

Prof. Dr. Benjamin Barber
Director of the Walt Whitman Center for the Culture and Politics of Democracy, Rutgers University, author of Jihad vs. McWorld, USA

Mr. John Browning
Contributing Editor, Wired, UK

Dr. Olarn Chaipravat
Director and Advisor to the Management Board, The Siam Commercial Bank, Thailand, Thailand

Mr. Ronnie Chan
Chairman of the Board, Hang Lung Development Co., previous Co-Chairman, Davos Annual Meeting of the World Economic Forum, Hong Kong, China

Prof. Dr. Kriengsak Chareonwongsak
Executive Director, Institute of Future Studies for Development, Thailand

Mr. Jürgen Dormann
Chief Executive Officer, Hoechst AG, Chairman of the Board of Trustees, Hoechst Foundation, Germany

Dr. William Drake
Senior Associate, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Washington, DC

Mr. Jörg Frank
Artist, Germany

Mr. Michael Freitag
Editor, Future Magazine, Germany

Dr. Martin Frühauf
Chairman of the Supervisory Board, Hoechst AG

Dr. Moira Gunn
Host of TechNation radio series, former NASA computer scientist, USA

Prof. Dr. András Inotai
General Director, Institute for World Economics of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences, Hungary

Mr. Josef Janning
Deputy Director, Center for Applied Policy Research, Munich, Germany

Prof. Dr. Jin-Ho Jeong
Professor of Global Competitiveness, FKI International Management Institute, South Korea

Prof. Dr. Michio Kaku
City University of New York, author of Visions: How Science will Revolutionize the 21st Century, USA

Dr. Maritta Koch-Weser
General Director, World Conservation Union, Switzerland

Prof. Dr. Duckhwan Lee
Professor of Chemist, Sogang University, South Korea

Mr. Douglas Merrill
Senior Research Fellow, Research Group on the Global Future, Center for Applied Policy Research

Dr. Günter Metz
Member of the Supervisory Board, Hoechst AG, Germany

Prof. Dr. Eckard Minx
Director, DaimlerChrysler Society and Technology Research Group, Germany

Christiane Müller-Schüll
Research Fellow, Research Group on the Global Future, Center for Applied Policy Research

Mr. Toshiya Nakamura
Kyoto News Agency, Japan

Mr. Karl-Heinz Narjes
Former Member of the European Commission, Germany

Hon. Boris Yefimovich Nemtsov
Former Governor of Nizhnii Novgorod, Russia

Dr. Beth Noveck
Director of International Programs, Yale Law School Information Society Program, New Haven, CT

Dr. Friedmar Nusch
Chairman of the Board of Management, Hoechst Foundation, Germany

Dr. Thomas Paulsen
Trend Research, Trend Research, HypoVereinsbank, Germany

Ms. Joanne Perez
Proprietary Trader, Banque National de Paris, France

Dr. Andreas Pohlmann
Member of the Board of Management, Hoechst Foundation, Germany

Dr. Eckhard Polzer
Former Chairman, Dornier Medical Technology, Germany

Mr. Stefan Sattler
Director of Culture Section, Focus Magazine, Germany

Prof. Dr. Gregory Stock
Director, Program on Science, Technology and Society,
University of California, Los Angeles, CA

Ms. Karin Truscheit
Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, Germany

Mr. Jürgen Turek
Director, Research Group on the Global Future, Center for Applied Policy Research, Munich, Germany

Dr. Sarasin Viraphol
Charoen Pokhand Group, Thailand

Dr. Joop de Vries
Executive Director, RISC - Futures, France

Mr. Arnd Wagner
Managing Director, Hoechst Foundation, Frankfurt, Germany

Mr. William Wechsler
Director for Multinational Threats, National Security Council, The White House, Washington, DC

Prof. Dr. Dr. h.c. Werner Weidenfeld
Director, Center for Applied Policy Research, Munich, Germany

Mr. Robert Wilson
Theater Director, USA

Prof. Dr. Ernst-Ludwig Winnacker
President, German Research Society, Germany

Mr. Baiyi Wu
Deputy Director, Research Department, China Foundation for International and Strategic Studies, China

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post~qXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate 9~q&+oMLntry(mC=lgc'pF闚V (6e:<url Ghttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/paper/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e0500-3bb9-37d985cd"hvrsdata Hoechst Triangle Forum - Future Societies - Contents

Index

Hoechst Triangle Forum

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Conference, September 8-10, 1999
Schloß Höchst, Frankfurt a.M., Germany

Mission | Program | Participants
Paper | Online Forum | Webcam

READ & DISCUSS
We invite you to read this paper and to tell us your opinion. Click to our online forum or send a quick e-mail.
 


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Future Societies:
Principles of Order for the 21st Century

Research Group on the Global Future

Discussion Paper for the Hoechst Triangle Forum
Schlo Höchst, September 8-10, Frankfurt, Germany

Table of Contents

I. Globalisation, Technological Innovation, and Social Change: Molding the 21st Century

II. Compensation - The Dialectic of an Interregnum

III. Digitalisation and Biotechnology: Chances and Challenges for Future Societies

IV. New Responsibility: Organising Sustainability


Word-Download: German Version


TOP




Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postFXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate mC=Ft6M+u<;ntry(o0.$rG ؒKz@*gLS.z[]+purl Jhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/triangle1999/webcam/schloss2.jpgmime text/htmlhvrsdata Error 404

Error 404


Der angeforderte URL existiert nicht!


Technische Informationen

benutzter Browser:Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 4.5; Mac_PowerPC)
anfragender Host:econ158.berkeley.edu (128.32.105.158 -> econ158.Berkeley.EDU)
angefragter Server:www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de (129.187.254.93)
URL-Pfad:/triangle1999/webcam/schloss2.jpg
Error-Code:404
Webmaster:uf29102@mail.lrz-muenchen.de


Zurück zur Homepage


© LRZ, 8.7.1999
postKz@XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate o0Kz@޴+;ntry(048iKbtsI=7url ?http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/neweconomy/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e0414-3c31-37d264d0"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - New Economy Portal - Overview

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Overview
Defining Characteristics
Research and Commentary
The Corporate World
Setting the Rules
Essential Reading
Links


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Overview

Click to enlarge the Global Communication Traffic Map provided by www.telegeography.com ...In the early 18th Century, few people anticipated the radical technological, economic, social and political transformations that the Industrial Revolution would bring. Yet the invention of the steam engine, the cotton loom and other mechanical devices inexorably altered the nature of life and work in our society.

On the eve of the 21st Century, we stand once again on the threshold of a new era. We bear witness to rapid technological innovation, increased globalization of business and society, and unprecedented growth rates; factors that culminate in a "New Economy". Because policy decisions made today will undoubtly affect future growth and development around the world, it is important to understand the nature of this economy and the forces driving these transformations.

We designed this portal to give the reader insight into the dynamic changes taking place in the world economy. Our goal is to encourage dialogue about key aspects of the "New Economy," to enable policymakers to make intelligent decisions for the future.


Index

Intro to the New Economy
Defining the Characteristics of the New Economy

Research and Commentary
Leading investigators of the New Economy

The Corporate World
Real examples of the New Economy at work

Essential Reading
Key Articles and Books on theNew Economy.

Setting the Rules for the New Economy
Links to government entities, NGO's and financial markets.

Links to Other New Economy Websites


Newsletter

Our newsletter global_futures will keep you up-to-date on the New Economy and other issues related to our common future. Read also past issues in our archives section.


Feedback

Please contact Douglas Merrill for feedback on this portal.


Other Portals

Visit also our portals on the digital world and on biotech issues.


TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postKbXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate KbuP+=7<1ntry(em5?5]btq\ +6%u]mFurl How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Biotech Portal

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Introduction
Link Overview
Documents
Bibliography
Book Reviews
Newsletter
Feedback


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Introduction: A Portal on Biotechnology

Biotech PortalHuman beings have been remaking the earth all through their history. After thousands of years of melting , forging or burning inanimate matter to create things, we are now able to reinvent the natural world at the most fundamental level -- the genetic one. Genetics and biotechnology offer a door to a new era of history. The sites that we have chosen for annotation should help you to follow the biotech revolution every step of the way.

You'll find links, relevant documents and a list of interesting books in our bibliography section. Comments are gratefully welcomed. Our newsletter global_futures keeps you up-to-date on the latest biotech news. Take also a look at our book reviews.

TOP


Links on the biotech revolution

Note that external hyperlinks will open a new browser window.

Key Gateways to Specific Resources

These comprehensive sites keep you abreast of the latest developments. They connect you with major universities, research centers and institutions which carry out work in fields such as biotech patents, genome mapping or bioinformatics.

Biotech Companies

Genetics and biotechnology have turned into big business. Global life-science companies are involved, as well as innovative start-up companies. Check out who's who in the biotech industry.

Bioethics

Since biotechnology touches upon all areas of life, ethical and societal implications are major concerns. Bioethics relate to a variety of issues, ranging from respect for human dignity to legal regulations and environmental questions. The sites mentioned here confront you with both questions and possible answers.

Biodiversity

The preservation of the variety in the plant and animal kingdoms is a worldwide concern. See what facets are embedded in the question of biodiversity.

Cloning

Ever since the lamb Dolly made it to the news, the issue of cloning, of humans in particular, has attracted broad public attention. Check the facts and take an unbiased view of pros and cons by surfing our selection of sites related to one of the hottest topics in discussion.

TOP




Biotech Documents

Download selected documents related to the consequences of the revolution in biotechnology.

TOP




Bibliography

Download a regularly updated bibliography on biotech thinking. See also our reviews.

TOP



Newsletter

The links on this website will be visited regularly to collect useful information on the digital revolution. In addition, we analyze the contents of major international print media. Subscribe to our newsletter global_futures to receive monthly information about articles, websites, events, documents and books on future matters. Also check out past editions.

TOP



Reviews

Read our reviews of books on the future - many of them dealing with biotechnology.

TOP



Feedback

Contact us by e-mail if you would like to add a link, a document or a book to our web site. Ideas and questions are welcomed.

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postq\XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate emq\H+FEntry(7LVD* ut7ڇA}x t8url How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Project Background

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Profile
Partners
Team
In the Press


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Profile

Read the mission statement on the project "How We Want to live Tomorrow".

Profile

Partners

Learn more about the Hoechst Foundation and the Center for Applied Policy Research.

Partners

Team

Click on the biographies of CAP's Project Team members.

Team

In the Press

Read the article "Gefangene im globalen Netzwerk" (Gegenwart der Zukunft, Süddeutsche Zeitung am 31.07./01.08.99).

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post7XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate 7LV7 How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Newsletter global_futures

Index

Newsletter global_futures

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Goal
Subscription
Archives



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Goal

Caption NewsletterThe e-mail newsletter global_futures keeps readers up to date on the work of the Research Group on the Global Future in the project How We Want to Live Tomorrow. Additionally, it provides tips on projects, publications, and other information that the Research Group believes provide special insight into the dynamics shaping our common future. For this purpose we regularly evaluate the websites of our portals to the future. We want to keep you up to date on future related issues of digitalization, genetics, economics and sustainability while saving the scarcest resource in an over-informed world - your attention.

TOP



Subscription

Enter your e-mail address, select your choice and press the send button. Your request will be fowarded to majordomo@lists.lrz-muenchen.de.



Subscribe global_futures

Unsubscribe global_futures


If you encounter any problems please do not hesitate to contact us.

TOP



Archives
TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post`EXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate z'`Eua+=<ntry( LX'J;Qųz$g7A8Ɂ Yurl ;http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/events/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e010e-58cb-37d23876"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Events

Index

Events

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


September 1999: Hoechst Triangle Forum (Conference)
May 1999: Decision Makers 2010 (Conference)
March 1999: Outlining the Future (Workshop)
July 1998: Digitalization (Brainstorming)
May 1998: Genetic Technology (Brainstorming)
March 1998: Agenda Brainstorming (Conference)



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



September 8-10, 1999, Frankfurt, Germany

Future Societies
Hoechst Triangle Forum
High-Level Conference


Mission
Program
Participants
Discussion Paper

TOP





May 10-12, 1999, Frankfurt, Germany

Decision Makers 2010
Defining Tomorrow's Agenda
Conference

Read the Executive Summary
Decision Makers 2010 provoked strong opinions among the thirty-one expert participants who debated the global future for three days in Frankfurt, Germany.

Executive Summary
Conclusions
Program
Participants
Papers
Books

Download (Word-File):
Program, Summary, Conclusions, Participants.

TOP






March 23, 1999, CAP, Munich, Germany

Outlining the Future
Perspectives on Societal Development
in the 21st Century

Workshop

Prof. Frederic Vester

Our views and expectations for the future play as much a part in how we make decisions as external, objective conditions. The Center for Applied Policy Research convened Germany's leading future researchers to compare exactly these views and expectations. What are the most important questions for thinking systematically about the future? What are the consequences of increasing networking and biotechnologization? What are the values of today that go furthest to shaping the world of tomorrow?

Executive Summary (English / German)
Program (English / German)
Participants (English / German)

Download the program, the executive summary, the summary of presentations and the list of participants as a Word document.

TOP





July 13, 1998, CAP, Munich, Germany

Digitalization
Shaping the Future
Brainstorming

Dettling, Marin, Weidenfeld

Digital processes are transforming the way people around the globe work and live; within Europe, Munich can rightly claim to be one of the centers of the new economy with its strengths in media, banking, and research. Our participants were all drawn from the local area, but they presented views that were far from parochial in character. Speakers considered the shape of an industrialized society after the digital revolution, with particular emphasis on likely economic consequences.

Speakers at the brainstorming included Dr. Gabriele Hooffacker of Hooffacker & Partner, Prof. Dalia Marin of the University of Munich's Economics Department, and Warnfried Dettling, of DIE ZEIT. Additional guests represented multimedia companies, banks, economic research institutes and news agencies.

Executive Summary
Program
Participants

Download the executive summary, the program, a list of participants and a list of short biographies as a PDF-Document.

TOP




May 18, 1998, CAP, Munich, Germany

Genetic Technology
Shaping the Future
Brainstorming

Kirschbaum

Munich's biotech industry is one of the strongest in Europe, so the CAP didn't have to go far afield to find world-class talent for a brainstorming session on the social and political implications of genetic technology. Our participants presented views on how the industry was likely to grow in the next two decades, along with longer-range ideas on the types of developments that society should expect from biotech.

Speakers at the brainstorming included Dr. Bernd Kirschbaum of Hoechst Marion Roussel's Center of Applied Genomics in Martinsried, Dr. Boris Steipe of the University of Munich's Genetic Research Center, and Dr. Reiner Anselm of the University of Munich's Institute for Systematic Theology. Dr. Paul Ulrich Unschuld of the Institute for the History of Medicine at the Ludwig Maximilian University of Munich provided particularly provocative cross-cultural commentary based on his extensive experience in China.

Executive Summary
Program
Participants and short biographies

Download the executive summary, the program, a list of participants and a list of short biographies as a PDF-Document.

TOP




March 23-24, 1998, CAP, Munich, Germany

How Do We Want to Live Tomorrow
Trilateral Agenda Brainstorming
Conference



Twenty-five forward-looking thinkers - from the Co-Chairman of the Davos World Economic Forum and a contributing editor to Wired magazine to the Secretary General of the German Catholic Bishops' Conference and a fellow from Resources for the Future - convened at the Center for Applied Policy Research in Munich to consider the question of how we want to live tomorrow in an interdisciplinary and intercultural fashion.

Executive Summary
Program
Participants

Download the executive summary, the program, a list of participants as a PDF-Document.

TOP




Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postųXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate Lų+YXntry(Y&Ne &<0u~7url :http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/links/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e035e-36ab-37d23398"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Links and Portals

Index

Links and Portals

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Key Links to the Future
Digital Portal
Biotech Portal
New Economy Portal


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Key links to the future

For a quick overview, visit a carefully compiled selection of websites on the global future.

TOP



Portals to the future

The future is knowledge management. Our portals will hyperlink your attention to many different matters, forces and persons which generate on a global scale our common future society.


Digital Portal

Start with digitalization. Computer chips are the foundation of the global networks.

TOP



Biotech Portal

Proceed with biotechnology. The future offers promising benefits, at the same time ethical and societal consequences must be addressed.

TOP


New Economy Portal

Go ahead with the new economy. The foundations of the global economy are changing radically.

TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post&XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate Y& +76ntry(Vl\6.°~*JXKdIcGeGun?url How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Book Reviews

Index

Book Reviews

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Latest Book Review
Recent Reviews



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Latest Book Review


Information.Macht.Krieg
Ars Electronica 98

By Gerfried Stocker and Christine Schöpf (eds.).

Springer Verlag, Wien New York 1998, ISBN 3-211-83192-4

English Edition: Gerfried Stocker, Christine Schoepf (ed): Info War. Vienna: Springer, ISBN 3-211-83191-6.

Reviewed by Christina Teuthorn.


Computer screens are the modern battle fields, future soldiers store deadly ammunition - knowledge, information, data - on the motherboard and launch deadly weapons with a mouse click. The arsenal ranges from computer viruses to worms, trojan horses, logic bombs or nano machines. Cyberwarriors, webterrorists, warbots, and Big Brother's eyes are Info War protagonists, whose language, Pentagonese, is hard to decipher: 21CLW, C3I, C4I2, OOTW...
...continue to read here.

TOP



Recent Reviews

Die Organisation des Wissens
By Ikujiro Nonaka and Hirotaka Takeuchi.

Why Things Bite Back
By Edwar Tenner

Globalisierung
By Alain Minc

The Future and Its Enemies
The Growing Conflict Over Creativity, Enterprise, and Progress
By Virginia Postrel

Banker to the Poor
By Muhammad Yunus

Life on the Screen
Identity in the Age of the Internet
By Sherry Turkle

Die Zukunft der Menschenrechte
(The Future of Human Rights)
By Gunnar Köhne (ed.)

Burn Rate
How I Survived the Gold Rush Years on the Internet
By Michael Wolff

The First $20 Million is Always the Hardest
By Po Bronson

The Biotech Century
By Jeremy Rifkin

Visions
How Science will Revolutionize the 21st Century
By Michio Kaku

Pax Democratica
A Strategy for the 21st Century
By James Robert Huntley

Global Public Policy
Governing without Government?
By Wolfgang Reinicke

Wirtschaftskummerland?
Wege aus der Globalisierungsfalle
(Economic Worryland? Paths Out of the Globalization Trap)
By Warnfried Dettling

The Lives to Come
The Genetic Revolution and Human Possibilities
By Philip Kitcher

City of Bits
Space, Place and the Infobahn
By William Mitchell

What will be
How the new world of information will change our lives
By Michael Dertouzos

The Diamond Age
By Neal Stephenson

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postKdIcXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate VKdIcF媴+?>ntry(t ?FHD2'_۩9Rurl How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Contact Us

Index

Contact Us

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Center for Applied Policy Research (CAP)

How to find the CAP

Hoechst Foundation




Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Center for Applied Policy Research
Research Group on the Global Future


Grafinger Strasse 2
81671 Munich
Germany
Tel +49-89-4904290
Fax +49-89-49042929
Web site: http://www.cap.uni-muenchen.de
E-Mail

Check also the Project Partners page and the Project Team section.

TOP



CAPHow to find the CAP

Arrival by airplane:

From Munich airport take the line S8 (local train) to the station 'Ostbahnhof'. Take the southern exit (Friedenstrasse) and turn right. At the next corner (Grafinger Strasse) you find the OTEC-Office building where the CAP ist located in the first floor.

Arrival by train:

From Munich's main station (Hauptbahnhof) take any S-Bahn (local train) to 'Ostbahnhof'. Take the southern exit (Friedenstrasse) and turn right. At the next corner (Grafinger Strasse) you find the OTEC-Office building where the CAP ist located in the first floor.

TOP



Hoechst Foundation

Altes Schlo Hchst
Hchster Schloplatz 16
65929 Frankfurt am Main
Germany
Tel +49-69-30582948
Fax +49-69-30523497
Web site: http://www.hoechst-foundation.org

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post2'XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate t 2'K+9R8Ontry(;6d 4g6H6 QN7Aurl ;http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/search/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e03f0-363f-37d2356d"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Search Engine

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search




Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Enter key words







Sort

URL
Number of Hits


Summary




Number of hits

Hits

Rows

Objects


TOP



Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

post6HXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ;6H+7A6?ntry(Ԇf2Q`1O{B,Cc-skkF(url How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Digital Portal

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Introduction
Links Overview
Documents
Bibliography
Book Reviews
Newsletter
Feedback


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Introduction: A Portal on Global Digitalization

Digital PortalThe future will be formed by many factors. Economic dynamics, political conflicts, environmental questions and technological innovations interact in complex ways. In this portal section of our Website we have chosen the digital revolution as a pilot theme to give deeper insight on one key part of the future. All the links, books, documents and information in this section are reviewed thoroughly to provide you with knowledge - and not to overload your mind with pieces of information. We focus on the interaction between digital technologies and the conditions of the human life in the future.

TOP


Links on the digital revolution

Note that external hyperlinks in the different Links Overview will open a new browser window.

Consultancy and Market Research

These sites usually serve to introduce the firm and provide marketing information to the general public. We scan these sites regularly to look for reports of special interest, which we bring to the attention of our newsletter subscribers.

Cyberspace, Culture & Visions

Where the digerati are pushing the boundaries of the new medium; the coolest sites we can find.

Governments & Governance

The official future. Some of them are interesting, some of them are merely definitive. Setting the standards and making the rules.

Interest Groups & Think Tanks

Online advocacy, political organization and proposals that are on their way to becoming policy. Real world politics in cyberspace, with real world interests and biases as well.

News Services & Online Magazines

Selected online versions of print media, some exclusively online services, with a strong emphasis on business and technology reporting.

Universities & Research Centers

Looking beyond the technology to its interaction with society and with individuals. Interpreting the consequences of the digital revolution.

TOP


Digital Documents

Download selected documents related to the digital revolution.

TOP


Bibliography

Download a regularly updated bibliography on digital thinking. Links lead to online extracts, reviews and presentations on the Internet. See also our reviews.

TOP


Book Reviews

Read our reviews of books on the future - many of them dealing with the digitalization of the global societies.

TOP


Newsletter

All the links on this website will be visited regularly to collect useful information on the digital revolution. In addition, we analyze the contents of major international print media. Subscribe to our newsletter global_futures to receive monthly information about articles, Websites, events, documents and books on digitalization matters. Also read past editions of the news on the wired world.

TOP


Feedback

Contact Patrick Meyer if you would like to add a link, a document or a book to our web site. Ideas and questions are welcomed.

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postBXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate Ԇf2Baj+F(E%ntry(1(H]yrq]U:'HU͡nurl =http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/digital/biblio.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e00ba-8bf9-37d231e3"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Digital Portal - Bibliography

Index

Project Profile

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Introduction
Links Overview
Documents
Bibliography
Book Reviews
Newsletter
Feedback


Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Bibliography on the Digital Revolution

Barbrook, Richard. Media Freedom: The Contradictions of Communication in the Age of Modernity (1995)
(online extracts)

Barett, Neil. Cultural, Political and Economic Implications of the Internet. Kogan Page, London (1996).

Bell, Daniel. The Coming of Post-Industrial Society: A Venture in Social Forecasting. New York: Basic Books (1973).

Borsook, Paulina. Cyberselfish: How the Digitial Elite Is Undermining Our Society, Culture and Values (forthcoming 1999).

Brin, David. The Transparent Society, New York: Addison-Wesley (1998).
(book review)

Brodie, Richard. Virus of the Mind: The New Science of the Meme (1995).


Burstein, Daniel and Kline, David. Road Warriors. Dreams and Nightmares along the Information Highway. New York (1995).

Carnoy, Martin et al.. The New Global Economy in the Information Age: Reflections on Our Changing World. University Park, PA (1993).

Castells, Manuel. The Rise of the Network Society, The Information Age: Economy, Society and Culture, Vol. I. Cambridge, MA; Oxford, UK: Blackwell (1996).
(book review)

Castells, Manuel. The Power of Identity, The Information Age: Economy, Society and Culture, Vol. II. Cambridge, MA; Oxford, UK: Blackwell (1997).
(book review)

Cairncross, Francis. The Death of Distance: How the Communications Revolution Will Change Our Lives. (1997)
(presentation)



Ceruzzi, Paul E. A History of Modern Computing: 1945-1995, MIT Press (1998)
(book review)

Coyle, Diane: The Weightless World. Strategies for Managing the Digital Economy, MIT Press (1998)
(presentation)

Davis, Erik. Tech Gnosis. Harmony Books (1998)
(book review)

Delarbre, Raúl Trejo . La Nueva Alfombra Magica: Usos y Mitos de Internet, la Red de Redes (The New Magic Carpet: Uses and Myths of the Internet, the Network of Networks) Madrid (1996).
(online version | book review)

Dery, Mark. Flame Wars: The Discourse of Cyberculture (1994).

Dery, Mark. Escape Velocity : Cyberculture at the End of the Century (1996).


Derzoutos, Michael. What will be - How the world of information will change our lives. HarperCollins, New York (1997).
(book review of the Research Group on the Global Future)

Diffie, Whitfield; Landau, Susan. Privacy on the Line: The Politics of Wiretapping and Encryption, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press (1998).
(book review 1 | book review 2)

Downes, Larry; Mui, Chunka. Unleashing the Killer App - Digital Strategies for Market Dominance, Harvard Business School, 1998
(presentation)

Drucker, Peter F. Post-Capitalist Society. New York (1993).

Dyson, Esther. Relsease 2.0.: A Design for Living in the Digital Age (1997).
(book review)



Figallo, Cliff: Hosting Web Communities: Building Relationships, Increasing Customer Loyalty, and Maintaining A Competitive Edge, John Wiley and Sons (1998).
(presentation)

Franck, Georg. Die Ökonomie der Aufmerksamkeit. Carl Hanser Verlag, München, Wien (1998).

Forester, Tom (ed.). The Information Technology Revolution. Cambridge, MA (1985).

Gates, Bill. The Road ahead. New York (1995).

Gibson, William. Neuromancer (1989)


Grossman, Lawrence K. The Electronic Republic: Reshaping Democracy in the Information Age. Penguin (1996).

Grossman, Wendy. net.wars, New York University Press (1997).
(book review)

Guggenberger, Bernd. Das digitale Nirwana. Rotbuch Verlag, Hamburg (1997).

Hagel, John III; Armstrong, Arthur G. Netgain - Expanding markets through virtual communities, Harvard Business School Press, Boston, MA (1997)

Hagel, John III; Singer, Marc. Net Worth - Shaping Markets When Customers Make The Rules, Harvard Business Press (1999).
(Presentation)



Hafner, Katie; Lyon, Matthew. Where Wizards Stay Up Late : The Origins of the Internet, Touchstone Books, Reprint edition (1998)

Hafner, Katie; Markoff, John: Cyberpunk : Outlaws and Hackers on the Computer Frontier, Touchstone Books (1995).

Harper, Christopher. And That's The Way It Will Be: News and Information in a Digital World (1998).

Healy, Jane: Failure to Connect: How Computers Affect Our Children's Minds - for Better and Worse, New York: Simon and Schuster (1998).

Heuser, Uwe Jean. Tausend Welten - Die Auflösung der Gesellschaft im digitalen Zeitalter. Berlin Verlag, Berlin (1996).

Hobart, Michael E., Schiffman, Zachary S. Information Ages: Literacy, Numeracy, and the Computer Revolution, Johns Hopk. (1998)
(book review)

Horn, Stacy. Cyberville: Clicks, Culture and the Creation of an Online Town. Warner Books (1998).
(presentation and extracts)

Johnson, Steven. Interface Culture: How New Technology Transforms The Way We Create And Communicate. HarperEdge (1997).


Johnson, Steven (ed.). Virtual Culture: Identity and Communication in Cybersociety. Sage Publications (1997).
(book review)

Kelly, Kevin. Out of Control. Addison-Wesley, New York (1994).
(entire book online | book review)

Kevin Kelly. New Rules for the New Economy: Ten Ways the Network Economy Is Changing Everything, London (1998).
(book review 1 | book review 2)

Kroker, Arthur; Kroker, Marilouise (Editors). Digital Delirium (1997)


Kubicek, Herbert et al.: Lernort Multimedia. Jahrbuch Telekommunikation und Gesellschaft 1998. Heidelberg. R. v.
Decker's Verlag. (1998)

Leggewie, Claus; Maar, Christa (Hrsg.). Internet & Politik - Von der Zuschauer- zur Beteiligungsdemokratie. Bollmann Verlag Köln(1998).

Lévy, Pierre: Collective Intelligence: Mankind's Emerging World in Cyberspace (1997).


Ludlow, Peter (ed.). High Noon on the Electronic Frontier. Boston: MIT Press (1996).
(online extracts)

Marchand, Philip; Postman, Neil. Marshall McLuhan: The Medium and the Messenger: A Biography (1998).

McGovern, Gerry. The Caring Economy, Blackhall Publishing, Dublin 1999.

McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media. The Extensions of Man. New York(1964).

McKnight, Lee W.; Bailey, Joseph P. (eds.). Internet Economics (1997).

Miller, Steven E. Civilizing Cyberspace, New York (1997).

Mitchell, William J. City of Bits. Space, Place, and the Infobahn, Cambridge / London (1995).
(book review of the Research Group on the Global Future | online version)

Mougayar, Walid. Opening Digital Markets : Battle Plans and Business Strategies for Internet Commerce (1997).


Nardi, Bonnie A.; O'Day, Vicki L. Information Ecologies: Using Technology with Heart. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press (1999)
(book review | special issue first monday)

Negroponte, Nicholas. Being digital. New York (1995).

Nefiodow, Leo A. Der Sechste Kondratieff - Wege zur Produktivität und Vollbeschäftigung im Zeitalter der Information (1997).

Nettime. Readme! Ascii Culture and the Revenge of Knowledge, New York (1999).
(book review, in German)

Norman, Don. The Invisible Computer Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, (1998).
(presentation | book review)

O'Donnell, James Joseph Avatars of the Word: From Papyrus to Cyberspace, Harvard University Press (1997)
(book review)

Porter, David (ed.). Internet Culture. New York: Routledge (1996).
(book review)

Rheingold, Howard. The Virtual Community: Homesteading on the Electronic Frontier. Addison-Wesley (1993).
(entire book online)

Rheingold, Howard. The Millennium Whole Earth Catalog: Access to Tools & Ideas for Twenty-First Century (1995).

Rötzer, Florian (ed.). Digitaler Schein, Aesthetik der Electronischen Medien, Suhrkamp Verlag, Frankfurt am Main (1991).
(book review)

Romer, Paul. Beyond the Knowledge Worker. in: World Link, Geneva (1995).

Rosenthal, David: Internet - Schöne neue Welt? Der Report über die unsichtbaren Risiken, Zürich 1999

Rushkoff, Douglas. Media Virus! Hidden Agendas in Popular Culture, Ballantine (1994).


Rushkoff, Douglas. Children of Chaos. Harpercollins UK (1994).

Rushkoff, Douglas. Cyberia: Life in the Trenches of HyperspaceHarperCollins (1994).

Sakaiya, Taichi. The Knowledge-Value Revolution. Or a History of the Future. Tokio (1985).

Seabrook, John. Deeper: A Two-Year Odyssey in Cyberspace. Faber and Faber (1997).

Shapiro, Andrew L.: The Control Revolution (1999).
(presentation)

Shapiro, Carl; Varian, Hal R. Information Rules - A Strategic Guide to the Network Economy, Harvard Business School, Cambridge (1998).
(book review1 | book review 2 | presentation)



Shenk, David. Data Smog: Surviving the Information Glut, New York: HarperEdge (1997).
(book review)

Shenk, David. The End of Patience: More Notes of Caution on the Information Revolution (1999).

Sennett, Richard: Flesh and Stone: The Body and the City in Western Civilization (1994).

Slouka, Mark. War of the Worlds: Cyberspace and the High-Tech Assault on Reality (1995).

Smith, Merritt Roe and Mary, Leo (eds.). Does Technology Drive History?

Stephens, Mitchell. From The Rise of the Image the Fall of the Word, Oxford University Press (1998).

Stoll, Clifford: The Silikon Snake Oil. Second Thoughts on the Information Highway. New York (1995).

Talbott, Stephen: The Future Does not Compute. Transcending the Machines in our Midst. Sebastopol, O'Reilly (1995).

Tapscott, Don; Caston, Art. Paradigm Shift : The New Promise of Information Technology (1992).

Tapscott, Don. The Digital Economy : Promise and Peril in the Age of Networked Intelligence (1996).
(book review)

Tapscott, Don. Growing Up Digital : The Rise of the Net Generation (1997).
(book review)

Tapscott, Don; Lowy, Alex; Ticoll, David. Blueprint to the Digital Economy: Wealth Creation in the Era of E-Business (1998).


Telepolis - Die Zeitschrift für Netzkultur. 0-Nummer. Bollmann Köln (1996).
(Telepolis)

Thurow, Lester. The Futur of Capitalism. How Today's Economic Forces shape Tomorrow's World. New York (1996).

Toffler, Alvin. The Third Wave. New York, Bantam Books (1980)

Toffler, Alvin and Toffler, Heidi. Creating a New Civilization. The Politics of the Third Wave. Atlanta (1995).

Turkle, Sherry. Life on the Screen: Identity in the Age of the Internet. Simon and Schuster (1995).
(presentation | book review | book review of the Research Group on the Global Future)

Webster, Frank. Theories of the Information Society. London, New York, Routledge (1995).

Whinston, Andrew B.; Stahl, Dale O.; Choi, Soon-Yong. The Economics of Electronic Commerce (1997).


Wolf, Michael J. The Entertainment Economy: How Mega Media Forces are transforming our lives. Times Books / Random House (1999).
(presentation)

Wolff Michael. Burn Rate - How I Survived the Gold Rush Years on the Internet. New York: Simon & Schuster (1998).
(book review by the Research Group on the Global Future |
presentation)

Wresch, William. Disconnected: Haves and Have-Nots in the Information Age. Rutgers University Press (1996).
(book review)

Young, Kimberly S. Caught in the Net: How to Recognize the Signs of Internet Addiction and a Winning Strategy for Recover. N. Y.: Wiley & Sons (1998).
(book review)


TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postU:'XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate 1U:'=c+ntry(=g,<1+pϙN+AI;+)߷Burl =http://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/partners/index.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"1f3e0372-41a4-37d234da"hvrsdata How We Want to Live Tomorrow - Project Partners - Center for Applied Policy Research - Hoechst Foundation

Index

Project Partners

Project Background
Newsletter global_futures
Events
Links and Portals
Book Reviews
Contact Us
Search


Center for Applied Policy Research (CAP)
Hoechst Foundation

Back to Project Background



Project Partners

Link to Hoechst Foundation

Link to CAP



Center for Applied Policy Research
University of Munich, Germany

CAPThe Center for Applied Policy Research (CAP) at the University of Munich has been set up to bridge the gap between social science and politics by applying concepts, methods and findings from the social sciences to policy issues on the European and international agenda.
Thus it makes use of scientifically founded analyses and strategies to develop solutions for political problems in Europe and Germany. Especially nowadays, were the political debate on key foreign policy issues is increasingly suffering from disorientation with the social sciences lacking the practical experiences to retard this trend, the Center organizes the scientific expertice and developes problem solving for today's politics.
The research groups at the CAP and their various projects combine international and interdisciplinary analyses with policy recommendations and communicate these to the relevant decision makers and to the public. In many projects the research fellows of the CAP work together with leading European social scientists. Within the past 15 years of experience, the Center has established a network of highly qualified social scientists for whom the CAP provides fora for expert opinions and functions as a consultancy to policy questions. The CAP is headed by Prof. Dr. Dr. h.c. Werner Weidenfeld.

TOP



Hoechst Foundation
Frankfurt, Germany

Hoechst FoundationThe Hoechst Foundation was established in 1996 as a charitable foundation of Hoechst AG with cash assets of DM 100 million. The overriding goal of the Foundation is to promote international, forward-looking, and interdisciplinary projects. In line with Hoechst AG's long history of cultural promotion, the Hoechst Foundation supports cultural initiatives in a broad sense.
"We must assume the most open interpretation of culture possible," commented Jürgen Dormann, Chief Executive Officer of Hoechst AG, on the establishment of the foundation. "Museums and galleries, concert halls, places of worship, and libraries are no longer the only places where culture is nourished and flourishes. We are interested in both artistic interpretations of familiar aspects of different cultures and in models that illustrate how we want to live in the future."
The projects promoted by the Hoechst Foundation are to transcend frontiers: not only those between people from a wide variety of countries and cultures but also frontiers between different academic disciplines. That is why in addition to art and culture, research projects in the natural sciences and humanities, especially those that pursue an interdisciplinary approach, are further possible areas of promotion. The Foundation will also promote social policy and charitable initiatives and projects set up by religious organizations. Since the Foundation aims to promote a wide variety of new ideas and initiatives, the scope of potential activities is not restricted. The Hoechst Foundation is primarily interested in finding and selecting major projects of international significance that correspond to its aims in a unique way. The Foundation will support them so as to ensure their lasting development. At the same time, the independence and innovative ability of the people involved should be preserved - which is why funding from the Foundation will be granted for a limited period of time.

TOP





Newsletter global-futures

HOME PAGE | PROJECT BACKGROUND | SEARCH

NEWSLETTER | EVENTS | LINKS & PORTALS | BOOK REVIEWS

CONTACT US at hoechst.forum@lrz.uni-muenchen.de

TOP

postXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate =g,^Z+BAntry(GPcwT*6bLߺiUjztIurl #http://www.hoechst-foundation.org/mime text/htmlhvrsdata Hoechst Foundation <body> </body> postbLXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate GbLr8+tntry({n5wğ-w7f>IjU=gurl http://www.cap.uni-muenchen.de/mime text/htmlhntt"1f3b0204-5456-37e0f8e1"hvrsdata Centrum fr angewandte Politikforschung - Center for Applied Policy Research - CAP
 
CAP Home Page Centrum fr angewandte Politikforschung
I N D E X
 
HOME + NEWS
HOME PAGE
CAPANORAMA NEWSLETTER
CAP-INFO MAILSERVICE
EUROPANORAMA
CAP-FORUM
PRESSESCHAU
LINKS

BER DAS CAP
PROFIL
LEITUNG
MITARBEITER

FORSCHUNGSGRUPPEN
BERTELSMANN POLITIK
DEUTSCHLAND
EUROPA
JUGEND und EUROPA
ZUKUNFTSFRAGEN

PROJEKT HOMEPAGES
EUROPÄISCHE NACHBARSCHAFT
FAZIT
GEIST & ZEIT
HOECHST TRIANGLE FORUM
TOLERANCE NETWORK
TRANSATLANTIC RELATIONS

PUBLIKATIONEN
ÜBERSICHT
AKTUELL (1998/1999)
DOWNLOADS

KONTAKT
ADRESSEN & ANFAHRT
DOKUMENTATIONSZENTRUM
GÄSTEBUCH
LEHRSTUHL

HILFE
SUCHEN
WEBMASTER

 
Aktuell am CAP

AKTUELL am CAP...

Hoechst Triangle Forum 1999

Experten aus Asien, Nordamerika und Europa entwarfen vom 8. bis 10. September in Frankfurt Visionen einer globalen Zukunftsgesellschaft. Das Hoechst Triangle Forum näherte sich der Welt von Morgen aus den unterschiedlichsten Perspektiven.

Hoechst Triangle Forum
Prof. Shlomo Avineri, Jrgen Dormann und Benjamin Barber auf dem Hoechst Triangle Forum.

 

Studieren Sie Programm und Teilnehmerliste und lesen Sie das Diskussionspapier. Sie können sich auch die Vorträge der Konferenz mit dem Real Player im Internet anhören.

Top of Page

EUROPANORAMA - Der neue Europa-Service

In Zusammenarbeit mit dem Informationsdienst politik-digital gibt das CAP einen E-Mail-Newsletter zu aktuellen europäischen Themen heraus. Zu einem Leitthema erhalten Sie Kommentare, ein Dossier, eine Online-Presseschau, Hyperlinks zu wissenschaftlichen Dokumenten, Leseempfehlungen und Internet-Tips. Die erste Ausgabe widmete sich dem neuen Europäischen Parlament. Schreiben Sie sich hier für die nächste Ausgabe ein!

Top of Page

Fortbildung Seminarleitung "Juniorteam"

Das CAP sucht junge Menschen aus Niedersachsen, die in zwei Seminaren vom 03.-05.11. und vom 08.-10.12.1999 in Ahlhorn Methoden der politischen Bildungsarbeit erlernen wollen.

Top of Page

Demokratie und Interessenausgleich in der Europischen Union

Claus Giering, Josef Janning, Wolfgang Merkel, Michael Stabenow: Demokratie und Interessenausgleich in der Europischen Union, Gtersloh 1999.

Demokratie und Interessenausgleich

Top of Page

European Integration Needs to Expand Its Horizon

Ein Artikel von Josef Janning in der International Herald Tribune vom 24.07.99.

Top of Page

CAPanorama 2/99 Download

Mehr Inhalt, neues Layout - die neueste Ausgabe des CAP-Newsletters berichtet auf 16 Seiten u.a. über: Decision Makers 2010, neue Projekte und Strukturen am CAP, das internationale Toleranz Netzwerk, das europäische Jugendparlament, den Zukunftsworkshop zur Digitalisierung, das Internationale Bertelsmann Forum in Warschau, das Geschichtsforum "50 Jahre Bundesrepublik Deutschland" und vieles mehr ....

(PDF-Download, 275 KB)

Newsletter Archiv

Top of Page

Lehrstuhl-Programm WS 1999/2000

Vorlesungen, Hauptseminare, Übungen und Grundkurse am Lehrstuhl für Politische Systeme und Europäische Einigung im nächsten Semester. Prof. Ruth Lapidoth aus Israel widmet sich in einer Vorlesung dem Friedensprozess in Nahost.

Top of Page

Handbuch zur deutschen Einheit - Neuausgabe

Die Epochenwende von 1989 rückt in eine geschichtliche Perspektive. Grund genug umfassend und systematisch den Prozeß der deutschen Vereinigung Revue passieren zu lassen und die Folgen der Einheit für die Bundesrepublik Deutschland zu analysieren.

Handbuch zur deutschen Einheit

Top of Page


W E I T E R E   N E W S

Glaab / Gros: Faktenlexikon Deutschland

Rieger: Agenda 2000

Korte: Wahlen in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland

Weidenfeld: Zeitenwechsel

Geschichtsforum 1949 - 1989 - 1999

Das CAP in der ZEIT: Vordenker und graue Eminenz

Positionspapier zur Agenda 2000

Außenpolitik für die deutsche Einheit

Paulsen: Economic Diplomacy

Gros: Politikgestaltung in der Regierung Kohl

IBF-Papier: Europa vor der Vollendung

Glaab: Deutschlandpolitik in der öffentlichen Meinung

Deutsche Europapolitik

Korte: Deutschlandpolitik war Chefsache





 
N A V I G A T I O N :
COPYRIGHT 1998-1999, CENTRUM FÜR ANGEWANDTE POLITIKFORSCHUNG (CAP)

CAP-INFO via E-Mail

Webmaster: cap@lrz.uni-muenchen.de


postwXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate {n5wRa+U=TVntry(~}Ii,Vբe-2|}CTfurl !http://www.pff.org/position.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"b09f10b8e4febe1:1144"hvrsdata Magna Carta

USA-Today Web ResouceThe FCC's Office of Plans and Policy

The Progress & Freedom Foundation

Print-friendly version

Cyberspace and the American Dream: A Magna Carta for the Knowledge Age

by Esther Dyson, George Gilder, George Keyworth, and Alvin Toffler

Release 1.2, August 22, 1994

This statement represents the cumulative wisdom and innovation of many dozens of people. It is based primarily on the thoughts of four "co-authors": Ms. Esther Dyson; Mr. George Gilder; Dr. George Keyworth; and Dr. Alvin Toffler. This release 1.2 has the final "imprimatur" of no one. In the spirit of the age: It is copyrighted solely for the purpose of preventing someone else from doing so. If you have it, you can use it any way you want. However, major passages are from works copyrighted individually by the authors, used here by permission; these will be duly acknowledged in release 2.0. It is a living document. Release 2.0 will be released in October 1994. We hope you'll use it is to tell us how to make it better. Do so by:

  • Sending e-mail to mail@pff.org
  • Faxing 202/289-8928 or calling 202/289-6079
  • Sending POM (plain old mail) to 1301 K Street Suite 550 East, Washington, DC 20005

(The Progress & Freedom Foundation is a not-for-profit research and educational organization dedicated to creating a positive vision of the future founded in the historic principles of the American idea.)

Preamble

The central event of the 20th century is the overthrow of matter. In technology, economics, and the politics of nations, wealth -- in the form of physical resources -- has been losing value and significance. The powers of mind are everywhere ascendant over the brute force of things.

In a First Wave economy, land and farm labor are the main "factors of production." In a Second Wave economy, the land remains valuable while the "labor" becomes massified around machines and larger industries. In a Third Wave economy, the central resource -- a single word broadly encompassing data, information, images, symbols, culture, ideology, and values -- is actionable knowledge.

The industrial age is not fully over. In fact, classic Second Wave sectors (oil, steel, auto-production) have learned how to benefit from Third Wave technological breakthroughs -- just as the First Wave's agricultural productivity benefited exponentially from the Second Wave's farm-mechanization.

But the Third Wave, and the Knowledge Age it has opened, will not deliver on its potential unless it adds social and political dominance to its accelerating technological and economic strength. This means repealing Second Wave laws and retiring Second Wave attitudes. It also gives to leaders of the advanced democracies a special responsibility -- to facilitate, hasten, and explain the transition.

As humankind explores this new "electronic frontier" of knowledge, it must confront again the most profound questions of how to organize itself for the common good. The meaning of freedom, structures of self-government, definition of property, nature of competition, conditions for cooperation, sense of community and nature of progress will each be redefined for the Knowledge Age -- just as they were redefined for a new age of industry some 250 years ago.

What our 20th-century countrymen came to think of as the "American dream," and what resonant thinkers referred to as "the promise of American life" or "the American Idea," emerged from the turmoil of 19th-century industrialization. Now it's our turn: The knowledge revolution, and the Third Wave of historical change it powers, summon us to renew the dream and enhance the promise.

The Nature of Cyberspace

The Internet -- the huge (2.2 million computers), global (135 countries), rapidly growing (10-15% a month) network that has captured the American imagination -- is only a tiny part of cyberspace. So just what is cyberspace?

More ecosystem than machine, cyberspace is a bioelectronic environment that is literally universal: It exists everywhere there are telephone wires, coaxial cables, fiber-optic lines or electromagnetic waves.

This environment is "inhabited" by knowledge, including incorrect ideas, existing in electronic form. It is connected to the physical environment by portals which allow people to see what's inside, to put knowledge in, to alter it, and to take knowledge out. Some of these portals are one-way (e.g. television receivers and television transmitters); others are two-way (e.g. telephones, computer modems).

Most of the knowledge in cyberspace lives the most temporary (or so we think) existence: Your voice, on a telephone wire or microwave, travels through space at the speed of light, reaches the ear of your listener, and is gone forever.

But people are increasingly building cyberspatial "warehouses" of data, knowledge, information and misinformation in digital form, the ones and zeros of binary computer code. The storehouses themselves display a physical form (discs, tapes, CD-ROMs) -- but what they contain is accessible only to those with the right kind of portal and the right kind of key.

The key is software, a special form of electronic knowledge that allows people to navigate through the cyberspace environment and make its contents understandable to the human senses in the form of written language, pictures and sound.

People are adding to cyberspace -- creating it, defining it, expanding it -- at a rate that is already explosive and getting faster. Faster computers, cheaper means of electronic storage, improved software and more capable communications channels (satellites, fiber-optic lines) -- each of these factors independently add to cyberspace. But the real explosion comes from the combination of all of them, working together in ways we still do not understand.

The bioelectronic frontier is an appropriate metaphor for what is happening in cyberspace, calling to mind as it does the spirit of invention and discovery that led ancient mariners to explore the world, generations of pioneers to tame the American continent and, more recently, to man's first exploration of outer space.

But the exploration of cyberspace brings both greater opportunity, and in some ways more difficult challenges, than any previous human adventure.

Cyberspace is the land of knowledge, and the exploration of that land can be a civilization's truest, highest calling. The opportunity is now before us to empower every person to pursue that calling in his or her own way.

The challenge is as daunting as the opportunity is great. The Third Wave has profound implications for the nature and meaning of property, of the marketplace, of community and of individual freedom. As it emerges, it shapes new codes of behavior that move each organism and institution -- family, neighborhood, church group, company, government, nation -- inexorably beyond standardization and centralization, as well as beyond the materialist's obsession with energy, money and control.

Turning the economics of mass-production inside out, new information technologies are driving the financial costs of diversity -- both product and personal -- down toward zero, "demassifying" our institutions and our culture. Accelerating demassification creates the potential for vastly increased human freedom.

It also spells the death of the central institutional paradigm of modern life, the bureaucratic organization. (Governments, including the American government, are the last great redoubt of bureaucratic power on the face of the planet, and for them the coming change will be profound and probably traumatic.)

In this context, the one metaphor that is perhaps least helpful in thinking about cyberspace is -- unhappily -- the one that has gained the most currency: The Information Superhighway. Can you imagine a phrase less descriptive of the nature of cyberspace, or more misleading in thinking about its implications? Consider the following set of polarities:

Information Superhighway     /     Cyberspace

Limited Matter               /     Unlimited Knowledge
Centralized                  /     Decentralized
Moving on a grid             /     Moving in space
Government ownership         /     A vast array of ownerships
Bureaucracy                  /     Empowerment
Efficient but not hospitable /     Hospitable if you customize it
Withstand the elements       /     Flow, float and fine-tune
Unions and contractors       /     Associations and volunteers
Liberation from First Wave   /     Liberation from Second Wave
Culmination of Second Wave   /     Riding the Third Wave

The highway analogy is all wrong," explained Peter Huber in Forbes this spring, "for reasons rooted in basic economics. Solid things obey immutable laws of conservation -- what goes south on the highway must go back north, or you end up with a mountain of cars in Miami. By the same token, production and consumption must balance. The average Joe can consume only as much wheat as the average Jane can grow. Information is completely different. It can be replicated at almost no cost -- so every individual can (in theory) consume society's entire output. Rich and poor alike, we all run information deficits. We all take in more than we put out."

The Nature and Ownership of Property

Clear and enforceable property rights are essential for markets to work. Defining them is a central function of government. Most of us have "known" that for a long time. But to create the new cyberspace environment is to create new property -- that is, new means of creating goods (including ideas) that serve people.

The property that makes up cyberspace comes in several forms: Wires, coaxial cable, computers and other "hardware"; the electromagnetic spectrum; and "intellectual property" -- the knowledge that dwells in and defines cyberspace.

In each of these areas, two questions that must be answered. First, what does "ownership" mean? What is the nature of the property itself, and what does it mean to own it? Second, once we understand what ownership means, who is the owner? At the level of first principles, should ownership be public (i.e. government) or private (i.e. individuals)?

The answers to these two questions will set the basic terms upon which America and the world will enter the Third Wave. For the most part, however, these questions are not yet even being asked. Instead, at least in America, governments are attempting to take Second Wave concepts of property and ownership and apply them to the Third Wave. Or they are ignoring the problem altogether.

For example, a great deal of attention has been focused recently on the nature of "intellectual property" -- i.e. the fact that knowledge is what economists call a "public good," and thus requires special treatment in the form of copyright and patent protection.

Major changes in U.S. copyright and patent law during the past two decades have broadened these protections to incorporate "electronic property." In essence, these reforms have attempted to take a body of law that originated in the 15th century, with Gutenberg's invention of the printing press, and apply it to the electronically stored and transmitted knowledge of the Third Wave.

A more sophisticated approach starts with recognizing how the Third Wave has fundamentally altered the nature of knowledge as a "good," and that the operative effect is not technology per se (the shift from printed books to electronic storage and retrieval systems), but rather the shift from a mass-production, mass-media, mass-culture civilization to a demassified civilization.

The big change, in other words, is the demassification of actionable knowledge.

The dominant form of new knowledge in the Third Wave is perishable, transient, customized knowledge: The right information, combined with the right software and presentation, at precisely the right time. Unlike the mass knowledge of the Second Wave -- "public good" knowledge that was useful to everyone because most people's information needs were standardized -- Third Wave customized knowledge is by nature a private good.

If this analysis is correct, copyright and patent protection of knowledge (or at least many forms of it) may no longer be unnecessary. In fact, the marketplace may already be creating vehicles to compensate creators of customized knowledge outside the cumbersome copyright/patent process, as suggested last year by John Perry Barlow:

    "One existing model for the future conveyance of intellectual property is real-time performance, a medium currently used only in theater, music, lectures, stand-up comedy and pedagogy. I believe the concept of performance will expand to include most of the information economy, from multi-casted soap operas to stock analysis. In these instances, commercial exchange will be more like ticket sales to a continuous show than the purchase of discrete bundles of that which is being shown. The other model, of course, is service. The entire professional class -- doctors, lawyers, consultants, architects, etc. -- are already being paid directly for their intellectual property. Who needs copyright when you're on a retainer?"

Copyright, patent and intellectual property represent only a few of the "rights" issues now at hand. Here are some of the others:

  • Ownership of the electromagnetic spectrum, traditionally considered to be "public property," is now being "auctioned" by the Federal Communications Commission to private companies. Or is it? Is the very limited "bundle of rights" sold in those auctions really property, or more in the nature of a use permit -- the right to use a part of the spectrum for a limited time, for limited purposes? In either case, are the rights being auctioned defined in a way that makes technological sense?
  • Ownership over the infrastructure of wires, coaxial cable and fiber-optic lines that are such prominent features in the geography of cyberspace is today much less clear than might be imagined. Regulation, especially price regulation, of this property can be tantamount to confiscation, as America's cable operators recently learned when the Federal government imposed price limits on them and effectively confiscated an estimated $___ billion of their net worth. (Whatever one's stance on the FCC's decision and the law behind it, there is no disagreeing with the proposition that one's ownership of a good is less meaningful when the government can step in, at will, and dramatically reduce its value.)
  • The nature of capital in the Third Wave -- tangible capital as well as intangible -- is to depreciate in real value much faster than industrial-age capital -- driven, if nothing else, by Moore's Law, which states that the processing power of the microchip doubles at least every 18 months. Yet accounting and tax regulations still require property to be depreciated over periods as long as 30 years. The result is a heavy bias in favor of "heavy industry" and against nimble, fast-moving baby businesses.

Who will define the nature of cyberspace property rights, and how? How can we strike a balance between interoperable open systems and protection of property?

The Nature Of The Marketplace

Inexpensive knowledge destroys economies-of-scale. Customized knowledge permits "just in time" production for an ever rising number of goods. Technological progress creates new means of serving old markets, turning one-time monopolies into competitive battlegrounds.

These phenomena are altering the nature of the marketplace, not just for information technology but for all goods and materials, shipping and services. In cyberspace itself, market after market is being transformed by technological progress from a "natural monopoly" to one in which competition is the rule. Three recent examples:

  • The market for "mail" has been made competitive by the development of fax machines and overnight delivery -- even though the "private express statutes" that technically grant the U.S. Postal Service a monopoly over mail delivery remain in place.
  • During the past 20 years, the market for television has been transformed from one in which there were at most a few broadcast TV stations to one in which consumers can choose among broadcast, cable and satellite services.
  • The market for local telephone services, until recently a monopoly based on twisted-pair copper cables, is rapidly being made competitive by the advent of wireless service and the entry of cable television into voice communication. In England, Mexico, New Zealand and a host of developing countries, government restrictions preventing such competition have already been removed and consumers actually have the freedom to choose.

The advent of new technology and new products creates the potential for dynamic competition -- competition between and among technologies and industries, each seeking to find the best way of serving customers' needs. Dynamic competition is different from static competition, in which many providers compete to sell essentially similar products at the lowest price.

Static competition is good, because it forces costs and prices to the lowest levels possible for a given product. Dynamic competition is better, because it allows competing technologies and new products to challenge the old ones and, if they really are better, to replace them. Static competition might lead to faster and stronger horses. Dynamic competition gives us the automobile.

Such dynamic competition -- the essence of what Austrian economist Joseph Schumpeter called "creative destruction" -- creates winners and losers on a massive scale. New technologies can render instantly obsolete billions of dollars of embedded infrastructure, accumulated over decades. The transformation of the U.S. computer industry since 1980 is a case in point.

In 1980, everyone knew who led in computer technology. Apart from the minicomputer boom, mainframe computers were the market, and America's dominance was largely based upon the position of a dominant vendor -- IBM, with over 50% world market-share.

Then the personal-computing industry exploded, leaving older-style big-business-focused computing with a stagnant, piece of a burgeoning total market. As IBM lost market-share, many people became convinced that America had lost the ability to compete. By the mid-1980s, such alarmism had reached from Washington all the way into the heart of Silicon Valley.

But the real story was the renaissance of American business and technological leadership. In the transition from mainframes to PCs, a vast new market was created. This market was characterized by dynamic competition consisting of easy access and low barriers to entry. Start-ups by the dozens took on the larger established companies -- and won.

After a decade of angst, the surprising outcome is that America is not only competitive internationally, but, by any measurable standard, America dominates the growth sectors in world economics -- telecommunications, microelectronics, computer networking (or "connected computing") and software systems and applications.

The reason for America's victory in the computer wars of the 1980s is that dynamic competition was allowed to occur, in an area so breakneck and pell-mell that government would've had a hard time controlling it _even had it been paying attention_. The challenge for policy in the 1990s is to permit, even encourage, dynamic competition in every aspect of the cyberspace marketplace.

The Nature of Freedom

Overseas friends of America sometimes point out that the U.S. Constitution is unique -- because it states explicitly that power resides with the people, who delegate it to the government, rather than the other way around.

This idea -- central to our free society -- was the result of more than 150 years of intellectual and political ferment, from the Mayflower Compact to the U.S. Constitution, as explorers struggled to establish the terms under which they would tame a new frontier.

And as America continued to explore new frontiers -- from the Northwest Territory to the Oklahoma land-rush -- it consistently returned to this fundamental principle of rights, reaffirming, time after time, that power resides with the people.

Cyberspace is the latest American frontier. As this and other societies make ever deeper forays into it, the proposition that ownership of this frontier resides first with the people is central to achieving its true potential.

To some people, that statement will seem melodramatic. America, after all, remains a land of individual freedom, and this freedom clearly extends to cyberspace. How else to explain the uniquely American phenomenon of the hacker, who ignored every social pressure and violated every rule to develop a set of skills through an early and intense exposure to low-cost, ubiquitous computing.

Those skills eventually made him or her highly marketable, whether in developing applications-software or implementing networks. The hacker became a technician, an inventor and, in case after case, a creator of new wealth in the form of the baby businesses that have given America the lead in cyberspatial exploration and settlement.

It is hard to imagine hackers surviving, let alone thriving, in the more formalized and regulated democracies of Europe and Japan. In America, they've become vital for economic growth and trade leadership. Why? Because Americans still celebrate individuality over conformity, reward achievement over consensus and militantly protect the right to be different.

But the need to affirm the basic principles of freedom is real. Such an affirmation is needed in part because we are entering new territory, where there are as yet no rules -- just as there were no rules on the American continent in 1620, or in the Northwest Territory in 1787.

Centuries later, an affirmation of freedom -- by this document and similar efforts -- is needed for a second reason: We are at the end of a century dominated by the mass institutions of the industrial age. The industrial age encouraged conformity and relied on standardization. And the institutions of the day -- corporate and government bureaucracies, huge civilian and military administrations, schools of all types -- reflected these priorities. Individual liberty suffered -- sometimes only a little, sometimes a lot:

  • In a Second Wave world, it might make sense for government to insist on the right to peer into every computer by requiring that each contain a special "clipper chip."
  • In a Second Wave world, it might make sense for government to assume ownership over the broadcast spectrum and demand massive payments from citizens for the right to use it.
  • In a Second Wave world, it might make sense for government to prohibit entrepreneurs from entering new markets and providing new services.
  • And, in a Second Wave world, dominated by a few old-fashioned, one-way media "networks," it might even make sense for government to influence which political viewpoints would be carried over the airwaves.

All of these interventions might have made sense in a Second Wave world, where standardization dominated and where it was assumed that the scarcity of knowledge (plus a scarcity of telecommunications capacity) made bureaucracies and other elites better able to make decisions than the average person.

But, whether they made sense before or not, these and literally thousands of other infringements on individual rights now taken for granted make no sense at all in the Third Wave.

For a century, those who lean ideologically in favor of freedom have found themselves at war not only with their ideological opponents, but with a time in history when the value of conformity was at its peak. However desirable as an ideal, individual freedom often seemed impractical. The mass institutions of the Second Wave required us to give up freedom in order for the system to "work."

The coming of the Third Wave turns that equation inside-out. The complexity of Third Wave society is too great for any centrally planned bureaucracy to manage. Demassification, customization, individuality, freedom -- these are the keys to success for Third Wave civilization.

The Essence of Community

If the transition to the Third Wave is so positive, why are we experiencing so much anxiety? Why are the statistics of social decay at or near all-time highs? Why does cyberspatial "rapture" strike millions of prosperous Westerners as lifestyle rupture? Why do the principles that have held us together as a nation seem no longer sufficient -- or even wrong?

The incoherence of political life is mirrored in disintegrating personalities. Whether 100% covered by health plans or not, psychotherapists and gurus do a land-office business, as people wander aimlessly amid competing therapies. People slip into cults and covens or, alternatively, into a pathological privatism, convinced that reality is absurd, insane or meaningless. "If things are so good," Forbes magazine asked recently, "why do we feel so bad?"

In part, this is why: Because we constitute the final generation of an old civilization and, at the very same time, the first generation of a new one. Much of our personal confusion and social disorientation is traceable to conflict within us and within our political institutions -- between the dying Second Wave civilization and the emergent Third Wave civilization thundering in to take its place.

Second Wave ideologues routinely lament the breakup of mass society. Rather than seeing this enriched diversity as an opportunity for human development, they attach it as "fragmentation" and "balkanization." But to reconstitute democracy in Third Wave terms, we need to jettison the frightening but false assumption that more diversity automatically brings more tension and conflict in society.

Indeed, the exact reverse can be true: If 100 people all desperately want the same brass ring, they may be forced to fight for it. On the other hand, if each of the 100 has a different objective, it is far more rewarding for them to trade, cooperate, and form symbiotic relationships. Given appropriate social arrangements, diversity can make for a secure and stable civilization.

No one knows what the Third Wave communities of the future will look like, or where "demassification" will ultimately lead. It is clear, however, that cyberspace will play an important role knitting together in the diverse communities of tomorrow, facilitating the creation of "electronic neighborhoods" bound together not by geography but by shared interests.

Socially, putting advanced computing power in the hands of entire populations will alleviate pressure on highways, reduce air pollution, allow people to live further away from crowded or dangerous urban areas, and expand family time.

The late Phil Salin (in Release 1.0 11/25/91) offered this perspective: "[B]y 2000, multiple cyberspaces will have emerged, diverse and increasingly rich. Contrary to naive views, these cyberspaces will not all be the same, and they will not all be open to the general public. The global network is a connected 'platform' for a collection of diverse communities, but only a loose, heterogeneous community itself. Just as access to homes, offices, churches and department stores is controlled by their owners or managers, most virtual locations will exist as distinct places of private property."

"But unlike the private property of today," Salin continued, "the potential variations on design and prevailing customs will explode, because many variations can be implemented cheaply in software. And the 'externalities' associated with variations can drop; what happens in one cyberspace can be kept from affecting other cyberspaces."

"Cyberspaces" is a wonderful pluralistic word to open more minds to the Third Wave's civilizing potential. Rather than being a centrifugal force helping to tear society apart, cyberspace can be one of the main forms of glue holding together an increasingly free and diverse society.

The Role of Government

The current Administration has identified the right goal: Reinventing government for the 21st Century. To accomplish that goal is another matter, and for reasons explained in the next and final section, it is not likely to be fully accomplished in the immediate future. This said, it is essential that we understand what it really means to create a Third Wave government and begin the process of transformation.

Eventually, the Third Wave will affect virtually everything government does. The most pressing need, however, is to revamp the policies and programs that are slowing the creation of cyberspace. Second Wave programs for Second Wave industries -- the status quo for the status quo -- will do little damage in the short run. It is the government's efforts to apply its Second Wave modus operandi to the fast-moving, decentralized creatures of the Third Wave that is the real threat to progress. Indeed, if there is to be an "industrial policy for the knowledge age," it should focus on removing barriers to competition and massively deregulating the fast-growing telecommunications and computing industries.

One further point should be made at the outset: Government should be as strong and as big as it needs to be to accomplish its central functions effectively and efficiently. The reality is that a Third Wave government will be vastly smaller (perhaps by 50 percent or more) than the current one -- this is an inevitable implication of the transition from the centralized power structures of the industrial age to the dispersed, decentralized institutions of the Third. But smaller government does not imply weak government; nor does arguing for smaller government require being "against" government for narrowly ideological reasons.

Indeed, the transition from the Second Wave to the Third Wave will require a level of government activity not seen since the New Deal. Here are five proposals to back up the point.

1. The Path to Interactive Multimedia Access

The "Jeffersonian Vision" offered by Mitch Kapor and Jerry Berman has propelled the Electronic Frontier Foundation's campaign for an "open platform" telecom architecture:

    "The amount of electronic material the superhighway can carry is dizzying, compared to the relatively narrow range of broadcast TV and the limited number of cable channels. Properly constructed and regulated, it could be open to all who wish to speak, publish and communicate. None of the interactive services will be possible, however, if we have an eight-lane data superhighway rushing into every home and only a narrow footpath coming back out. Instead of settling for a multimedia version of the same entertainment that is increasingly dissatisfying on today's TV, we need a superhighway that encourages the production and distribution of a broader, more diverse range of programming" (New York Times 11/24/93 p. A25).

The question is: What role should government play in bringing this vision to reality? But also: Will incentives for the openly-accessible, "many to many," national multimedia network envisioned by EFF harm the rights of those now constructing thousands of non-open local area networks?

These days, interactive multimedia is the daily servant only of avant-garde firms and other elites. But the same thing could have been said about word-processors 12 years ago, or phone-line networks six years ago. Today we have, in effect, universal access to personal computing -- which no political coalition ever subsidized or "planned." And America's networking menu is in a hyper-growth phase. Whereas the accessing software cost $50 two years ago, today the same companies hand it out free -- to get more people on-line.

This egalitarian explosion has occurred in large measure because government has stayed out of these markets, letting personal computing take over while mainframes rot (almost literally) in warehouses, and allowing (no doubt more by omission than commission) computer networks to grow, free of the kinds of regulatory restraints that affect phones, broadcast and cable.

All of which leaves reducing barriers to entry and innovation as the only effective near-term path to Universal Access. In fact, it can be argued that a near-term national interactive multimedia network is impossible unless regulators permit much greater collaboration between the cable industry and phone companies. The latter's huge fiber resources (nine times as extensive as industry fiber and rising rapidly) could be joined with the huge asset of 57 million broadband links (i.e. into homes now receiving cable-TV service) to produce a new kind of national network -- multimedia, interactive and (as costs fall) increasingly accessible to Americans of modest means.

That is why obstructing such collaboration -- in the cause of forcing a competition between the cable and phone industries -- is socially elitist. To the extent it prevents collaboration between the cable industry and the phone companies, present federal policy actually thwarts the Administration's own goals of access and empowerment.

The other major effect of prohibiting the "manifest destiny" of cable preserves the broadcast (or narrowband) television model. In fact, stopping an interactive multimedia network perpetuates John Malone's original formula -- which everybody (especially Vice-President Gore and the FCC) claims to oppose because of the control it leaves with system owners and operators.

The key condition for replacing Malone's original narrowband model is true bandwidth abundance. When the federal government prohibits the interconnection of conduits, the model gains a new lease on life. In a world of bandwidth scarcity, the owner of the conduit not only can but must control access to it -- thus the owner of the conduit also shapes the content. It really doesn't matter who the owner is. Bandwidth scarcity will require the managers of the network to determine the video programming on it.

Since cable is everywhere, particularly within cities, it would allow a closing of the gap between the knowledge-rich and knowledge-poor. Cable's broadband "pipes" already touch almost two-thirds of American households (and are easily accessible to another one-fourth). The phone companies have broadband fiber. A hybrid network -- co-ax plus fiber -- is the best means to the next generation of cyberspace expansion. What if this choice is blocked?

In that case, what might be called cyberspace democracy will be confined to the computer industry, where it will arise from the Internet over the years, led by corporate and suburban/exurban interests. While not a technological calamity, this might be a social perversion equivalent to what "Japan Inc." did to its middle and lower classes for decades: Make them pay 50% more for the same quality vehicles that were gobbling up export markets.

Here's the parallel: If Washington forces the phone companies and cable operators to develop supplementary and duplicative networks, most other advanced industrial countries will attain cyberspace democracy -- via an interactive multimedia "open platform" -- before America does, despite this nation's technological dominance.

Not only that, but the long-time alliance of East Coast broadcasters and Hollywood glitterati will have a new lease on life: If their one-way video empires win new protection, millions of Americans will be deprived of the tools to help build a new interactive multimedia culture.

A contrived competition between phone companies and cable operators will not deliver the two-way, multimedia and more civilized tele-society Kapor and Berman sketch. Nor is it enough to simply "get the government out of the way." Real issues of antitrust must be addressed, and no sensible framework exists today for addressing them. Creating the conditions for universal access to interactive multimedia will require a fundamental rethinking of government policy.

2. Promoting Dynamic Competition

Technological progress is turning the telecommunications marketplace from one characterized by "economies of scale" and "natural monopolies" into a prototypical competitive market. The challenge for government is to encourage this shift -- to create the circumstances under which new competitors and new technologies will challenge the natural monopolies of the past.

Price-and-entry regulation makes sense for natural monopolies. The tradeoff is a straightforward one: The monopolist submits to price regulation by the state, in return for an exclusive franchise on the market.

But what happens when it becomes economically desirable to have more than one provider in a market? The continuation of regulation under these circumstances stops progress in its tracks. It prevents new entrants from introducing new technologies and new products, while depriving the regulated monopolist of any incentive to do so on its own.

Price-and-entry regulation, in short, is the antithesis of dynamic competition.

The alternative to regulation is antitrust. Antitrust law is designed to prevent the acts and practices that can lead to the creation of new monopolies, or harm consumers by forcing up prices, limiting access to competing products or reducing service quality. Antitrust law is the means by which America has, for over 120 years, fostered competition in markets where many providers can and should compete.

The market for telecommunications services -- telephone, cable, satellite, wireless -- is now such a market. The implication of this simple fact is also simple, and price/entry regulation of telecommunications services -- by state and local governments as well as the Federal government -- should therefore be replaced by antitrust law as rapidly as possible.

This transition will not be simple, and it should not be instantaneous. If antitrust is to be seriously applied to telecommunications, some government agencies (e.g. the Justice Department's Antitrust Division) will need new types of expertise. And investors in regulated monopolies should be permitted time to re-evaluate their investments given the changing nature of the legal conditions in which these firms will operate -- a luxury not afforded the cable industry in recent years.

This said, two additional points are important. First, delaying implementation is different from delaying enactment. The latter should be immediate, even if the former is not. Secondly, there should be no half steps. Moving from a regulated environment to a competitive one is -- to borrow a cliche -- like changing from driving on the left side of the road to driving on the right: You can't do it gradually.

3. Defining and Assigning Property Rights

In 1964, libertarian icon Ayn Rand wrote:

    "It is the proper task of government to protect individual rights and, as part of it, formulate the laws by which these rights are to be implemented and adjudicated. It is the government's responsibility to define the application of individual rights to a given sphere of activity -- to define (i.e. to identify), not create, invent, donate, or expropriate. The question of defining the application of property rights has arisen frequently, in the wake of oil rights, vertical space rights, etc. In most cases, the American government has been guided by the proper principle: It sought to protect all the individual rights involved, not to abrogate them." ("The Property Status of the Airwaves," Objectivist Newsletter, April 1964)

Defining property rights in cyberspace is perhaps the single most urgent and important task for government information policy. Doing so will be a complex task, and each key area -- the electromagnetic spectrum, intellectual property, cyberspace itself (including the right to privacy) -- involves unique challenges. The important points here are:

    First, this is a "central" task of government. A Third Wave government will understand the importance and urgency of this undertaking and begin seriously to address it; to fail to do so is to perpetuate the politics and policy of the Second Wave.

    Secondly, the key principle of ownership by the people -- private ownership -- should govern every deliberation. Government does not own cyberspace, the people do.

    Thirdly, clarity is essential. Ambiguous property rights are an invitation to litigation, channeling energy into courtrooms that serve no customers and create no wealth. From patent and copyright systems for software, to challenges over the ownership and use of spectrum, the present system is failing in this simple regard.

The difference between America's historic economic success can, in case after case, be traced to our wisdom in creating and allocating clear, enforceable property rights. The creation and exploration of cyberspace requires that wisdom to be recalled and reaffirmed.

4. Creating Pro-Third-Wave Tax and Accounting Rules

We need a whole set of new ways of accounting, both at the level of the enterprise, and of the economy.

"GDP" and other popular numbers do nothing to clarify the magic and muscle of information technology. The government has not been very good at measuring service-sector output, and almost all institutions are incredibly bad at measuring the productivity of information. Economists are stuck with a set of tools designed during, or as a result of, the 1930s. So they have been measuring less and less important variables with greater and greater precision.

At the level of the enterprise, obsolete accounting procedures cause us to systematically overvalue physical assets (i.e. property) and undervalue human-resource assets and intellectual assets. So, if you are an inspired young entrepreneur looking to start a software company, or a service company of some kind, and it is heavily information-intensive, you will have a harder time raising capital than the guy next door who wants to put in a set of beat-up old machines to participate in a topped-out industry.

On the tax side, the same thing is true. The tax code always reflects the varying lobbying pressures brought to bear on government. And the existing tax code was brought into being by traditional manufacturing enterprises and the allied forces that arose during the assembly line's heyday.

The computer industry correctly complains that half their product is depreciated in six months or less -- yet they can't depreciate it for tax purposes. The U.S. semiconductor industry faces five-year depreciation timetables for products that have three-year lives (in contrast to Japan, where chipmakers can write off their fabrication plants in one year). Overall, the tax advantage remains with the long, rather than the short, product life-cycle, even though the latter is where all design and manufacturing are trending.

It is vital that accounting and tax policies -- both those promulgated by private-sector regulators like the Financial Accounting Standards Board and those promulgated by the government at the IRS and elsewhere -- start to reflect the shortened capital life-cycles of the Knowledge Age, and the increasing role of intangible capital as "wealth."

5. Creating a Third Wave Government

Going beyond cyberspace policy per se, government must remake itself and redefine its relationship to the society at large. No single set of policy changes that can create a future-friendly government. But there are some yardsticks we can apply to policy proposals. Among them:

  • Is it based on the factory model, i.e. on standardization, routine and mass-production? If so, it is a Second Wave policy. Third Wave policies encourage uniqueness.
  • Does it centralize control? Second Wave policies centralize power in bureaucratic institutions; Third Wave policies work to spread power -- to empower those closest to the decision.
  • Does it encourage geographic concentration? Second Wave policies encourage people to congregate physically; Third Wave policies permit people to work at home, and to live wherever they choose.
  • Is it based on the idea of mass culture -- of everyone watching the same sitcoms on television -- or does it permit, even encourage, diversity within a broad framework of shared values? Third Wave policies will help transform diversity from a threat into an array of opportunities.

A serious effort to apply these tests to every area of government activity -- from the defense and intelligence community to health care and education -- would ultimately produce a complete transformation of government as we know it. Since that is what's needed, let's start applying.

Grasping the Future

The conflict between Second Wave and Third Wave groupings is the central political tension cutting through our society today. The more basic political question is not who controls the last days of industrial society, but who shapes the new civilization rapidly rising to replace it. Who, in other words, will shape the nature of cyberspace and its impact on our lives and institutions?

Living on the edge of the Third Wave, we are witnessing a battle not so much over the nature of the future -- for the Third Wave will arrive -- but over the nature of the transition. On one side of this battle are the partisans of the industrial past. On the other are growing millions who recognize that the world's most urgent problems can no longer be resolved within the massified frameworks we have inherited.

The Third Wave sector includes not only high-flying computer and electronics firms and biotech start-ups. It embraces advanced, information-driven manufacturing in every industry. It includes the increasingly data-drenched services -- finance, software, entertainment, the media, advanced communications, medical services, consulting, training and learning. The people in this sector will soon be the dominant constituency in American politics.

And all of those confront a set of constituencies made frightened and defensive by their mainly Second Wave habits and locales: Command-and-control regulators, elected officials, political opinion-molders, philosophers mired in materialism, traditional interest groups, some broadcasters and newspapers -- and every major institution (including corporations) that believes its future is best served by preserving the past.

For the time being, the entrenched powers of the Second Wave dominate Washington and the statehouses -- a fact nowhere more apparent than in the 1993 infrastructure bill: Over $100 billion for steel and cement, versus one lone billion for electronic infrastructure. Putting aside the question of whether the government should be building electronic infrastructure in the first place, the allocation of funding in that bill shows the Second Wave swamping the Third.

Only one political struggle so far contradicts the landscape offered in this document, but it is a big one: Passage of the North American Free Trade Agreement last November. This contest carried both sides beyond partisanship, beyond regionalism, and -- after one climactic debate on CNN -- beyond personality. The pro-NAFTA coalition opted to serve the opportunity instead of the problem, and the future as opposed to the past. That's why it constitutes a standout model for the likely development of a Third Wave political dialectic.

But a "mass movement" for cyberspace is still hard to see. Unlike the "masses" during the industrial age, this rising Third Wave constituency is highly diverse. Like the economic sectors it serves, it is demassified -- composed of individuals who prize their differences. This very heterogeneity contributes to its lack of political awareness. It is far harder to unify than the masses of the past.

Yet there are key themes on which this constituency-to-come can agree. To start with, liberation -- from Second Wave rules, regulations, taxes and laws laid in place to serve the smokestack barons and bureaucrats of the past. Next, of course, must come the creation -- creation of a new civilization, founded in the eternal truths of the American Idea.

It is time to embrace these challenges, to grasp the future and pull ourselves forward. If we do so, we will indeed renew the American Dream and enhance the promise of American life.

postբeXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ~բegM+Tnntry(dLUA2OR+rOLZ0}gV3dwurl 3http://www.ispo.cec.be/infosoc/backg/bangeman.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"e1e8-1638e-37d7c401"hvrsdata Europe and the global information society - Bangemann report

Recommendations to the European Council

Europe and the global information society


Members of the High-Level Group on the Information Society

Martin Bangemann
Enrico Cabral da Fonseca
Peter Davis
Carlo de Benedetti
Pehr Gyllenhammar
Lothar Hunsel
Pierre Lescure
Pascual Maragall
Gaston Thorn
Candido Velazquez-Gastelu
Peter Bonfield
Etienne Davignon
Jean-Marie Descarpentries
Brian Ennis
Hans-Olaf Henkel
Anders Knutsen
Constantin Makropoulos
Romano Prodi
Jan Timmer
Heinrich von Pierer

Europe and the global information society
Recommendations to the European Council

In its Brussels meeting of December 1993, the European Council requested that a report be prepared for its meeting on 24 - 25 June 1994 in Corfu by a group of prominent persons on the specific measures to be taken into consideration by the Community and the Member States for the infrastructures in the sphere of information.

On the basis of this report, the Council will adopt an operational programme defining precise procedures for action and the necessary means.

Brussels, 26 May 1994


Contents

Chapter I: The information society - new ways of living and working together

A revolutionary challenge to decision makers
Partnership for jobs
If we seize the opportunity
A common creation or a still fragmented Europe ?
What we can expect for...
The social challenge
Time to press on
An Action Plan
New markets in Europe's information society
Chapter II: A market-driven revolution
A break with the past
Ending monopoly
Enabling the market
Towards a positive outcome

Chapter III: Completing the agenda

Protection of intellectual property rights (IPR)
Privacy
Electronic protection (encryption), legal protection and security
Media ownership
The role of competition policy
Technology

Chapter IV: The building blocks of the information society

The opportunity for the Union - strengthening its existing networks and accelerating the creation of new ones
New basic services are needed
Blazing the trail - ten applications to launch the information society
Application One: Teleworking
Application Two: Distance learning
Application Three: A network for universities and research centres
Application Four: Telematic services for SMEs
Application Five: Road traffic management
Application Six: Air traffic control
Application Seven: Healthcare networks
Application Eight: Electronic tendering
Application Nine: Trans-european public administration network
Application Ten: City information highways

Chapter V: Financing the information society a task for the private sector

Chapter VI: Follow-up

An Action Plan - summary of recommendations


This Report urges the European Union to put its faith in market mechanisms as the motive power to carry us into the Information Age.

This means that actions must be taken at the European level and by Member States to strike down entrenched positions which put Europe at a competitive disadvantage:

  • it means fostering an entrepreneurial mentality to enable the emergence of new dynamic sectors of the economy

  • it means developing a common regulatory approach to bring forth a competitive, Europe-wide, market for information services

  • it does NOT mean more public money, financial assistance, subsidies, dirigisme, or protectionism.

In addition to its specific recommendations, the Group proposes an Action Plan of concrete initiatives based on a partnership between the private and public sectors to carry Europe forward into the information society.


Chapter 1
The information society -
new ways of living and working together

A revolutionary challenge to decision makers

Throughout the world, information and communications technologies are generating a new industrial revolution already as significant and far-reaching as those of the past.

It is a revolution based on information, itself the expression of human knowledge. Technological progress now enables us to process, store, retrieve and communicate information in whatever form it may take - oral, written or visual - unconstrained by distance, time and volume.

This revolution adds huge new capacities to human intelligence and constitutes a resource which changes the way we work together and the way we live together.

This revolution adds huge new capacities to human intelligence and.... changes the way we work together and the way we live together.

Europe is already participating in this revolution, but with an approach which is still too fragmentary and which could reduce expected benefits. An information society is a means to achieve so many of the Union's objectives. We have to get it right, and get it right now.

Partnership for jobs

Europe's ability to participate, to adapt and to exploit the new technologies and the opportunities they create, will require partnership between individuals, employers, unions and governments dedicated to managing change. If we manage the changes beforeus with determination and understanding of the social implications, we shall all gain in the long run.

Our work has been sustained by the conviction expressed in the Commission's White Paper, Growth, Competitiveness and Employment, that "...the enormous potential for new services relating to production, consumption, culture and leisure activities will create large numbers of new jobs...". Yet nothing will happen automatically. We have to act to ensure that these jobs are created here, and soon. And that means public and private sectors acting together.

If we seize the opportunity

All revolutions generate uncertainty, discontinuity - and opportunity. Today's is no exception. How we respond, how we turn current opportunities into real benefits, will depend on how quickly we can enter the European information society.

In the face of quite remarkable technological developments and economic opportunities, all the leading global industrial players are reassessing their strategies and their options.

A common creation or a still fragmented Europe?

The first countries to enter the information society will reap the greatest rewards. They will set the agenda for all who must follow. By contrast, countries which temporise, or favour half-hearted solutions, could, in less than a decade, face disastrousdeclines in investment and a squeeze on jobs.

Given its history, we can be sure that Europe will take the opportunity. It will create the information society. The only question is whether this will be a strategic creation for the whole Union, or a more fragmented and much less effective amalgam of individual initiatives by Member States, with repercussions on every policy area, from the single market to cohesion.

The only question is whether this will be a strategic creation for the whole Union, or a more fragmented and much less effective amalgam of individual initiatives by Member States.

What we can expect for...

  • Europe's citizens and consumers:
    A more caring European society with a significantly higher quality of life and a wider choice of services and entertainment.

  • the content creators:
    New ways to exercise their creativity as the information society calls into being new products and services.

  • Europe's regions:
    New opportunities to express their cultural traditions and identities and, for those standing on the geographical periphery of the Union, a minimising of distance and remoteness.

  • governments and administrations:
    More efficient, transparent and responsive public services, closer to the citizen and at lower cost.

  • European business and small and medium sized enterprises:
    More effective management and organisation, access to training and other services, data links with customers and suppliers generating greater competitiveness.

  • Europe's telecommunications operators:
    The capacity to supply an ever wider range of new high value-added services.

  • the equipment and software suppliers; the computer and consumer electronics industries:
    New and strongly-growing markets for their products at home and abroad.

The social challenge

The widespread availability of new information tools and services will present fresh opportunities to build a more equal and balanced society and to foster individual accomplishment. The information society has the potential to improve the qua-lity of life of Europe's citizens, the efficiency of our social and economic organisation and to reinforce cohesion.

The information society has the potential to improve the quality of life of Europe's citizens, the efficiency of our social and economic organisation and to reinforce cohesion.

The information revolution prompts profound changes in the way we view our societies and also in their organisation and structure. This presents us with a major challenge: either we grasp the opportunities before us and master the risks, or we bow to them, together with all the uncertainties this may entail.

The main risk lies in the creation of a two-tier society of have and have-nots, in which only a part of the population has access to the new technology, is comfortable using it and can fully enjoy its benefits. There is a danger that individuals will reject the new information culture and its instruments.

Such a risk is inherent in the process of structural change. We must confront it by convincing people that the new technologies hold out the prospect of a major step forward towards a European society less subject to such constraints as rigidity, inertia and compartmentalisation. By pooling resources that have traditionally been separate, and indeed distant, the information infrastructure unleashes unlimited potential for acquiring knowledge, innovation and creativity.

Mastering risks, maximising benefits

Thus, we have to find ways to master the risks and maximise the benefits. This places responsibilities on public authorities to establish safeguards and to ensure the cohesion of the new society. Fair access to the infrastructure will have to be guaranteed to all, as will provision of universal service, the definition of which must evolve in line with the technology.

A great deal of effort must be put into securing widespread public acceptance and actual use of the new technology. Preparing Europeans for the advent of the information society is a priority task. Education, training and promotion will necessarily playa central role. The White Paper's goal of giving European citizens the right to life-long education and training here finds its full justification. In order best to raise awareness, regional and local initiatives - whether public or private - should be encouraged.

Preparing Europeans for the advent of the information society is a priority task. Education, training and promotion will necessarily play a central role.

The arrival of the information society comes in tandem with changes in labour legislation and the rise of new professions and skills. Continuous dialogue between the social partners will be extremely important if we are to anticipate and to manage the imminent transformation of the work place. This concerted effort should reflect new relationships at the work place induced by the changing environment.

More detailed consideration of these issues exceeds the scope of this Report. The Group wishes to stress that Europe is bound to change, and that it is in our interest to seize this opportunity. The information infrastructure can prove an extraordinary instrument for serving the people of Europe and improving our society by fully reflecting the original and often unique values which underpin and give meaning to our lives.

At the end of the day, the added value brought by the new tools, and the overall success of the information society, will depend on the input made by our people, both individually and in working together. We are convinced that Europeans will meet this challenge.

Time to press on

Why the urgency? Because competitive suppliers of networks and services from outside Europe are increasingly active in our markets. They are convinced, as we must be, that if Europe arrives late our suppliers of technologies and services will lack the commercial muscle to win a share of the enormous global opportunities which lie ahead. Our companies will migrate to more attractive locations to do business. Our export markets will evaporate. We have to prove them wrong.

Tide waits for no man, and this is a revolutionary tide, sweeping through economic and social life. We must press on. At least we do not have the usual European worry about catching up. In some areas we are well placed, in others we do need to do more - but this is also true for the rest of the world's trading nations.

The importance of the sector was evident by its prominence during the Uruguay Round of GATT negotiations. This importance is destined to increase.

We should not be sceptical of our possibilities for success. We have major technological, entrepreneurial and creative capabilities. However, the diffusion of information is still too restricted andtoo expensive. This can be tackled quickly through regulatory reforms.

Public awareness of the technologies has hitherto been too limited. This must change. Political attention is too intermittent. The private sector expects a new signal.

Political attention is too intermittent. The private sector expects a new signal.

An Action Plan

This Report outlines our vision of the information society and the benefits it will deliver to our citizens and to economic operators. It points to areas in which action is needed now so we can start out on the market-led passage to the new age, as well as to the agents which can drive us there.

As requested in the Council's mandate, we advocate an Action Plan based on specific initiatives involving partnerships linking public and private sectors. Their objective is to stimulate markets so that they can rapidly attain critical mass.

In this sector, private investment will be the driving force. Monopolistic, anticompetitive environments are the real roadblocks to such involvement. The situation here is completely different from that of other infrastructural investments where public funds are still crucial, such as transport.

This sector is in rapid evolution. The market will drive, it will decide winners and losers. Given the power and pervasiveness of the technology, this market is global.

The market will drive ... the prime task of government is to safeguard competitive forces....

The prime task of government is to safeguard competitive forces and ensure a strong and lasting political welcome for the information society, so that demand-pull can finance growth, here as elsewhere.

By sharing our vision, and appreciating its urgency, Europe's decision-makers can make the prospects for our renewed economic and social development infinitely brighter.

New markets in Europe's information society

Information has a multiplier effect which will energise every economic sector. With market driven tariffs, there will be a vast array of novel information services and applications:

  • from high cost services, whose premium prices are justified by the value of benefits delivered, to budget price products designed for mass consumption;

  • from services to the business community, which can be tailored to the needs of a specific customer, to standardised packages which will sell in high volumes at low prices;

  • from services and applications which employ existing infrastructure, peripherals and equipment (telephone and cable TV networks, broadcasting systems, personal computers, CD players and ordinary TV sets) to those which will be carried via new technologies, such as integrated broadband, as these are installed.

Markets for business

Large and small companies and professional users are already leading the way in exploiting the new technologies to raise the efficiency of their management and production systems. And more radical changes to business organisation and methods are on the way.

Business awareness of these trends and opportunities is still lower in Europe compared to the US. Companies are not yet fully exploiting the potential for internal reorganisation and for adapting relationships with suppliers, contractors and customers. We have a lot of pent up demand to fill.

Business awareness of these trends and opportunities is still lower in Europe compared to the US.

In the business markets, teleconferencing is one good example of a business application worth promoting, while much effort is also being dedicated worldwide to the perfection of telecommerce and electronic document interchange (EDI).

Both offer such cost and time advantages over traditional methods that, once applied, electronic procedures rapidly become the preferred way of doing business. According to some estimates, handling an electronic requisition is one tenth the cost of handling its paper equivalent, while an electronic mail (e-mail) message is faster, more reliable and can save 95% of the cost of a fax.

Electronic payments systems are already ushering in the cashless society in some parts of Europe. We have a sizeable lead over the rest of the world in smart card technology and applications. This is an area of global market potential.

Markets for small and medium sized enterprises

Though Europe's 12 million SMEs are rightly regarded as the backbone of the European economy, they do need to manage both information and managerial resources better.

They need to be linked to easy access, cost-effective networks providing information on production and market openings. The competitiveness of the whole industrial fabric would be sharpened if their relationships with large companies were based on the new technologies.

Networked relationships with universities, research institutes and laboratories would boost their prospects even more by helping to remedy chronic R&D deficiencies. Networking will also diminish the isolation of SMEs in Europe's less advantaged regions, helping them to upgrade their products and find wider markets.

Markets for consumers

These are expected to be richly populated with services, from home banking and teleshopping to a near-limitless choice of entertainment on demand.

In Europe, like the United States, mass consumer markets may emerge as one of the principal driving forces for the information society. American experience already shows that the development markets encounters a number of obstacles and uncertainties.

Given the initial high cost of new pay-per-view entertainment services, and of the related equipment, as well as the high cost of bringing fibre optics to the home, a large mass consumer market will develop more easily if entertainment services are part of a broader package. This could also include information data, cultural programming, sporting events, as well as telemarketing and teleshopping. Pay-per-view for on-line services, as well as advertising, will both be necessary as a source of revenue. To some extent, existing satellite and telephone infrastructure can help to serve the consumer market in the initial phase.

At the moment, this market is still only embryonic in Europe and is likely to take longer to grow than in the United States. There, more than 60% of households are tapped by cable TV systems which could also carry text and data services. In Europe, only 25% are similarly equipped, and this figure masks great differences between countries, e.g. Belgium (92%) and Greece (1-2%).

Another statistic: in the United States there are 34 PCs per hundred citizens. The European figure overall is 10 per hundred, though the UK, for instance, at 22 per hundred, is closer to the US level of computer penetration.

Lack of available information services and poor computer awareness could therefore prove handicaps in Europe. Telecommunication networks are, however, comparable in size and cover, but lag behind in terms of utilisation. These networks, therefore, can act as the basic port of access for the initial services, but stimulation of user applications is still going to be necessary.

Such structural weaknesses need not halt progress. Europe's technological success with CD-ROM and CD-I could be the basis for a raft of non-networked applications and services during the early formative years of the information society. These services on disk have considerable export potential if Europe's audio-visual industry succeeds in countering current US dominance in titles.

In terms of the market, France's Minitel network already offers an encouraging example that European consumers are prepared to buy information and transaction services on screen, if the access price is right. It reaches nearly 30 million private and business subscribers through six million small terminals and carries about 15,000 different services. Minitel has created many new jobs, directly and indirectly, through boosting business efficiency and competitiveness.

In the UK, the success of the Community-sponsored Homestead programme, using CD-I, is indicative, as is the highly successful launch of (an American) dedicated cable teleshopping channel.

Meanwhile in the US, where the consumer market is more advanced, video-on-demand and home shopping could emerge as the most popular services.

Audio-visual markets

Our biggest structural problem is the financial and organisational weakness of the European programme industry. Despite the enormous richness of the European heritage, and the potential of our creators, most of the programmes and most of the stocks of acquired rights are not in European hands. A fast growing European home market can provide European industry with an opportunity to develop a home base and to exploit increased possibilities for exports.

Linguistic fragmentation of the market has long been seen as a disadvantage for Europe's entertainment and audio-visual industry, especially with English having an overwhelming dominance in the global market - a reflection of the US lead in production and, importantly, in distribution. This lead, which starts with cinema and continues withtelevision, is likely to be extended to the new audio-visual areas. However, once products can be easily accessible to consumers, there will be more opportunities for expression of the multiplicity of cultures and languages in which Europe abounds.

...once products can be easily accessible to consumers, there will be more opportunities for expression of the multiplicity of cultures and languages in which Europe abounds.

Europe's audio-visual industry is also burdened with regulations. Some of these will soon be rendered obsolete by the development of new technologies, hampering the development of a dynamic European market.

As a first step to stimulating debate on the new challenges, the Commission has produced a Green Paper on the audio-visual industry.


Chapter 2
A market-driven revolution

A break with the past

The Group is convinced that technological progress and the evolution of the market mean that Europe must make a break from policies based on principles which belong to a time before the advent of the information revolution.

The key issue for the emergence of new markets is the need for a new regulatory environment allowing full competition. This will be a prerequisite for mobilising the private capital necessary for innovation, growth and development.

In order to function properly, the new market requires that all actors are equipped to participate successfully, or at least that they do not start with significant handicaps. All should be able to operate according to clearrules, within a single, fair and competitive framework.

The Group recommends Member States to accelerate the ongoing process of liberalisation of the telecom sector by:

  • opening up to competition infrastructures and services still in the monopoly area

  • removing non-commercial political burdens and budgetary constraints imposed on telecommunications operators

  • setting clear timetables and dead lines for the implementation of practical measures to achieve these goals

Ending monopoly

This is as true for the telecommunications operators (TOs) as for others. It is now generally recognised as both necessary and desirable that the political burdens on them should be removed, their tariffs adjusted and a proper regulatory framework created. Even the operations of those TOs whose status has already evolved over recent years are not fully in line.

It is possible to end monopoly. In future, all licensed public operators should assume their share of public service responsibilities (e.g. universal service obligation and the provision of equal access to networks and services).

A competitive environment requires the following:

  • TOs relieved of political constraints, such as:

    • subsidising public functions;

    • external R&D activities;

    • contributions to land planning and management objectives;

    • the burden to carry alone the responsibility of universal service;

  • a proper regulatory framework designed to achieve:

    • market regulation to enable and to protect competition;

    • a predictable environment to make possible strategic planning and investment;

  • adjustment of tariffs.

Enabling the market

The Group recommends the establishment at the European level of an authority whose terms of reference will require a prompt attention.

In order for the market to operate successfully, the Group has identified the following objectives and recommendations:

Evolution in the regulatory domain

Identify and establish the minimum of regulation needed, at the European level, to ensure the rapid emergence of efficient European information infrastructures and services. The terms of reference of the authority which will be responsible for the enforcement of this regulation is a question that will require a prompt attention.

The urgency of the matter is in direct relation to the prevailing market conditions. A clear requirement exists for the new "rules of the game" to be outlined as soon as possible. The market place will then be in a position to anticipate the forthcoming framework, and the opportunity will exist for those wishing to move rapidly to benefit from these efforts.

The authority will need to address:

  • the regulation of those operations which, because of their Community-wide nature, need to be addressed at the European level, such as licensing, network interconnection when and where necessary, management of shared scarce resources (e.g. radio-frequency allocation, subscriber numbering and advice to Member States regulatory authorities on general issues.

  • a single regulatory framework valid for all operators, which would imply lifting unequal conditions for market access. It would also ensure that conditions for network access and service use be guided by the principles of transparency and non-discrimination, complemented by practical rules for dispute resolution and speedy remedy against abuse dominance.

Interconnection and interoperability

Two features are essential to the deployment of the information infrastructure needed by the information society: one is a seamless interconnection of networks and the other that the services and applications which build on them should be able to work together (interoperability).

In the past the political will to interconnect national telephone networks resulted in hundreds of millions of subscriber connections world-wide. Similar political determination and corresponding effort are required to set up the considerably more complex information infrastructures.

Interconnection of networks and interoperability of services and applications are recommended as primary Union objectives.

The challenge is to provide interconnections for a variety of networking conditions (e.g. fixed and new type of networks, such as mobile and satellite) and basic services (e.g. Integrated Service Digital Network - ISDN). Currently, the positions of monopoly operators are being eroded in these fast-developing areas.

Joint commercial decisions must be taken by the TOs without delay to ensure rapid extension of European basic services beyond telephony. This would improve their competitive position vis-à-vis non-European players in their own markets.

The European information society is emerging from many different angles. European infrastructure is evolving into an ever tighter web of networks, generic services, applications and equipment, the development, distribution and maintenance of which occupy a multitude of sources worldwide.

In an efficient and expanding information infrastructure, such components should work together.

Assembling the various pieces of this complex system to meet the challenge of interoperability would be impossible without clear conventions. Standards are such conventions.

Open systems standards will play an essential role in building a European information infrastructure.

Standards institutes have an honourable record in producing European standards, but the standardisation process as it stands today raises a number of concerns about fitness for purpose, lack of interoperability, and priority setting that is not sufficiently market driven.

Action is required at three different levels:

  • at the level of operators, public procurement and investors:

    following the successful example of GSM digital mobile telephony, market players (industry, TOs, users) could establish Memoranda of Understanding (MoU) to set the specifications requirements for specific application objectives. These requirements would then provide input to the competent standardisation body. This type of mechanism would adequately respond to market needs.

    Operators, public procurement and investors should adopt unified open standard-based solutions for the provision and the procurement of information services in order to achieve global interoperability.

  • at the level of the European standards bodies:

    These should be encouraged to establish priorities based on market requirements and to identify publicly available specifications, originated by the market, which are suitable for rapid transformation into standards (e.g. through fast track procedures).

  • at the level of the Union:

    European standardisation policy should be reviewed in the light of the above. When the market is not providing acceptable technical solutions to achieve one of the European Union's objectives, a mechanism should be sought to select or generate suitable technologies.

World-wide interoperability should be promoted and secured.

The Group recommends a review of the European standardisation process in order to increase its speed and responsiveness to markets.

Urgent action to adjust tariffs

Reduction in international, long distance and leased line tariffs will trigger expansion in the usage of infrastructures, generating additional revenues, and simultaneously giving a major boost to generic services and innovative applications

Reduction in international, long distance and leased line tariffs will trigger expansion in the usage of infrastructures, generating additional revenues, and simultaneously giving a major boost to generic services and innovative applications

In most cases, the current unsatisfactory tariff situation results from the TOs' monopoly status and a variety of associated political constraints.

The introduction of competitive provision of services and infrastructures implies that TOs would be able to adjust their tariffs in line with market conditions. Rebalancing of international and long-distance versus local tariffs is a critical step in this process.

The Group recommends as a matter of urgency the adjustment of international, long distance and leased line tariffs to bring these down into line with rates practised in other advanced industrialised regions. Adjustment of tariffs should be accompanied by the fair sharing of public service obligations among operators.

Two elements should accompany the process:

  • TOs freed from politically imposed budgetary constraints;

  • a fair and equitable sharing of the burden of providing universal services between all licensed operators.

Fostering critical mass

Market segments based on the new information infrastructures cannot provide an adequate return on investment without a certain level of demand. In most cases, competition alone will not provide such a mass, or it will provide it too slowly.

A number of measures should be taken in order to reach this goal:

  • co-operation should be encouraged among competitors so as to create the required size and momentum in particular market areas. The already mentioned GSM MoU is an archetypal example of how positive this approach can be.

  • agreement between public administrations to achieve common requirements and specifications, and a commitment to use these in procurement at national and European levels.

  • extensive promotion and use of existing and forthcoming European networks and services.

  • awareness campaigns, notably directed at public administrations, SMEs and educational institutions.

It is recommended to promote public awareness. Particular attention should be paid to the small and medium sized business sector, public administrations and the younger generation.

In addition, everyone involved in building up the information society must be in a position to adapt strategies and forge alliances to enable them to contribute to, and benefit from, overall growth in the field.

Secure the world-wide dimension

The Group recommends that the openness of the European market should find its counterpart in markets and networks of other regions of the world. It is of paramount importance for Europe that adequate steps are taken to guarantee equal access.

Since information infrastructures are borderless in an open market environment, the information society has an essentially global dimension.

The actions advocated in this Report will lead to a truly open environment, where access is provided to all players. This openness should find its counterpart in markets and networks of other regions of the world. It is obviously of paramount importance for Europe that adequate steps are taken to guarantee equal access

Towards a positive outcome

The responses outlined above to the challenges posed by the deployment of the information society will be positive for all involved in its creation and use.

Telecommunications, cable and satellite operators will be in a position to take full advantage of market opportunities as they see fit, and to expand their market share.

The service provider and content industries will be able to offer innovative products at attractive prices.

Citizens and users will benefit from a broader range of competing services.

Telecommunication equipment and software suppliers will see an expanding market.

Those countries that have already opted for faster liberalisation, are experiencing rapidly expanding domestic markets that provide new opportunities for TOs, service providers and industry. For the others, the price to pay for a slower pace of liberalisation will be a stiffer challenge from more dynamic foreign competitors and a smaller domestic market. Time is running out. If action is not accelerated, many benefits will arrive late, or never.

It is an essential recommendation of the Group that governments support accelerated liberalisation by drawing up clear timetables and deadlines with practical measures to obtain this goal.

In this context, the 1993 Council Resolution remains a useful point of reference. Even before the specified dates, governments should take best advantage of its built inflexibility to seize the opportunities offered by a burgeoning competitive market. They should speed up the opening to competition of infrastructures and of those services that are still in the monopoly area, as well as remove political burdens imposed on their national TOs.

In this context, the 1993 Council Resolution remains a useful point of reference. Even before the specified dates, governments should take best advantage of its built-in flexibility to seize the opportunities offered by a burgeoning competitive market. They should speed up the opening to competition of infrastructures and of those services that are still in the monopoly area, as well as remove political burdens imposed on their national TOs.


Chapter 3
Completing the agenda

Several policy issues have to be faced in parallel with actions needed to create an open, competitive and market-driven information society. Disparate national regulatory reactions carry a very real threat of fragmentation to the internal market.

Here there are two different sets of issues and problems: one relating to the business community, the other more to individuals and the information society, with specific reference to privacy.

As we move into the information society, a regulatory response in key areas like intellectual property, privacy and media ownership is required at the European level in order to maximise the benefits of the single market for all players. Only the scale of the internal market is sufficient to justify and attract the required financing of high performance trans-European information networks.

Therefore, applying single market principle of freedom of movement of all goods and services, to the benefit of Europeans everywhere, must be our key objective.

The information society is global. The Group thus recommends that Union action should aim to establish a common and agreed regulatory framework for the protection of intellectual property rights, privacy and security of information, in Europe and, where appropriate internationally.

Protection of intellectual property rights (IPR)

While there is a great deal of information that is in the public domain, there is also information containing added value which is proprietary and needs protection via the enforcement of intellectual property rights. IPRs are an important factor in developing a competitive European industry, both in the area of information technology and more generally across a wide variety of industrial and cultural sectors.

Creativity and innovation are two of the Union's most important assets. Their protection must continue to be a high priority, on the basis of balanced solutions which do not impede the operation of market forces.

The global nature of the services that will be provided through the information networks means that the Union will have to be party to international action to protect intellectual property. Otherwise, serious difficulties will arise if regulatory systems in different areas of the world are operating on incompatible principles which permit circumvention or create jurisdictional uncertainties.

The Group believes that intellectual property protection must rise to the new challenges of globalisation and multimedia and must continue to have a high priority at both European and international levels.

In this global information market place, common rules must be agreed and enforced by everyone. Europe has a vested interest in ensuring that protection of IPRs receives full attention and that a high level of protection is maintained. Moreover, as the technology advances, regular world-wide consultation with all interested parties, both the suppliers and the user communities, will be required.

Initiatives already under way within Europe, such as the proposed Directive on the legal protection of electronic databases, should be completed as a matter of priority.

Meanwhile, in order to stimulate the development of new multimedia products and services, existing legal regimes - both national and Union - will have to be re-examined to see whether they are appropriate to the new information society. Where necessary, adjustments will have to be made.

In particular, the ease with which digitised information can be transmitted, manipulated and adapted requires solutions protecting the content providers. But, at the same time, flexibility and efficiency in obtaining authorisation for the exploitation ofworks will be a prerequisite for a dynamic European multimedia industry.

Privacy

The demand for the protection of privacy will rightly increase as the potential of the new technologies to secure (even across national frontiers) and to manipulate detailed information on individuals from data, voice and image sources is realised. Without the legal security of a Union-wide approach, lack of consumer confidence will certainly undermine rapid development of the information society.

Europe leads the world in the protection of the fundamental rights of the individual with regard to personal data processing. The application ofnew technologies potentially affects highly sensitive areas such as those dealing with the images of individuals, their communication, their movements and their behaviour. With this in mind, it is quite possible that most Member States will react to these developments by adopting protection, including trans-frontier control of new technologies and services.

Disparities in the level of protection of such privacy rules create the risk that national authorities might restrict free circulation of a wide range of new services between Member States in order to protect personal data.

The Group believes that without the legal security of a Union-wide approach, lack of consumer confidence will certainly undermine the rapid development of the information society. Given the importance andsensitivity of the privacy issue, a fast decision from Member States is required on the Commission's proposed Directive setting out general principles of data protection.

Electronic protection (encryption), legal protection and security

Encryption is going to become increasingly important in assuring the development of the pay services. Encryption will ensure that only those who pay will receive the service. It will also provide protection against personal data falling into the public domain.

International harmonisation would assist the market if it were to lead to a standard system of scrambling. Conditional access should ensure fair and open competition in the interests of consumers and service providers.

Encryption is particularly important for telecommerce, which requires absolute guarantees in areas such as the integrity of signatures and text, irrevocable time and date stamping and international legal recognition.

However, the increased use of encryption and the development of a single encryption system will increase the returns from hacking into the system to avoid payment or privacy restrictions. Without a legal framework that would secure service providers against piracy of their encryption system, there is the risk that they will not get involved in the development of these new services.

The Group recommends acceleration of work at European level on electronic and legal protection as well as security.

On the other hand, governments may need powers to override encryption for the purposes of fighting against crime and protecting national security.

An answer given at a national level to this and to the hacking issue will inevitably prove to be insufficient because communications reach beyond national frontiers and because the principles of the internal market prohibit measures such as import bans on decoding equipment.

Therefore, a solution at the European level is needed which provides a global answer to the problem of protection of encrypted signals and security. Based on the principles of the internal market it would create parity of conditions for the protection ofencrypted services as well as the legal framework for the development of these new services.

Media ownership

In addition to ownership controls to prevent monopoly abuse, most countries have rules on media and cross media ownership to preserve pluralism and freedom of expression.

In practice, these rules are a patchwork of inconsistency which tend to distort and fragment the market. They impede companies from taking advantage of the opportunities offered by the internal market, especially in multimedia, and could put them in jeopardy vis-à-vis non-European competitors.

In current circumstances, there is a risk of each Member State adopting purely national legislation in response to the new problems and challenges posed by the information society. Urgent attention has to be given to the question of how we can avoid such an undermining of the internal market and ensure effective rules which protect pluralism and competition.

Rules at the European level are going to be crucial, given the universality of the information society and its inherently transborder nature. The Union will have to lead the way in heading off deeper regulatory disparity. In so doing it will reinforce the legal security that is vital for the global competitiveness of Europe's media industry.

The Group believes that urgent attention should be given to the question of how we can avoid divergent national legislation on media ownership undermining the internal market. Effective rules must emerge to protect pluralism and competition.

The role of competition policy

Competition policy is a key element in Union strategy. It is especially important for consolidating the single market and for attracting the private capital necessary for the growth of the trans-European information infrastructure.

Areas of the information society are beset by intense globalising pressures. These affect both European and non-European companies operating inside the Union. If appropriate, the notion of a global, rather than a Union-wide, market should now be used inassessing European competition issues such as market power, joint ventures and alliances.

Competition Policy is a key element in Europe's strategy. The Group recommends that the application of competition rules should reflect the reality of the newly emerging global markets and the speed of change in the environment.

The aim should not be to freeze any set of regulations, but rather to establish procedures and policies through which the exploding dynamism of the sector can be translated into greater opportunities for wealth and job creation.

Like other commercial players, companies involved in the supply of technologies and services must be in a position to adapt their strategies and to forge alliances to enable them to contribute to, and to benefit from, overall growth in the sector in the framework of competition policy.

Technology

The technological base in Europe today is sufficient to launch the applications proposed in this reports without delay. They must focus on realistic systems on a sufficient scale to explore the value of the services offered to the user, and to evaluate the economic feasibility of the new information systems.

However, new technologies do still have to be developed for their full-scale introduction following these demonstrations. In particular, the usability and cost-effectiveness of the systems must be improved, and the consequences of mass use further investigated.

The research programmes of the Union and of Member States, in particular the Fourth Framework Programme, should be implemented in such a way as to take into account market requirements. Technical targets and the timing of projects must be defined with appropriate user involvement.


Chapter 4
The building blocks of
the information society

Communications systems combined with advanced information technologies are keys to the information society. The constraints of time and distance have been removed by networks (e.g. telephone, satellites, cables) which carry the information, basic services (e.g. electronic mail, interactive video) which allow people to use the networks and applications (e.g. distance learning, teleworking) which offer dedicated solutions for user groups.

The opportunity for the Union - strengthening its existing networks and accelerating the creationof new ones

ISDN: a first step

The traditional telephone network is changing its character. Having been built as a universal carrier for voice, it now has to meet the communication requirements of a modern economy going far beyond simple telephone calls.

One important development is the Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN. This offers the opportunity to send not only voice, but also data and even moving images through telephone lines.

ISDN is particularly suited for the communications needs of small and medium sized enterprises. It permits, for example, direct PC to PC communication, for instant, low-cost transmission of documents. Teleworking using ISDN services can be attractive to a wide range of businesses. ISDN is also an ideal support for distance learning.

EURO-ISDN, based on common standards, started at the end of 1993.

A number of European countries have a leading position which should be exploited.

The Group recommends priority extension of the availability of EURO-ISDN, in line with current Commission proposals, and reductions in tariffs to foster the market.

Broadband: the path to multimedia

ISDN is only the first step. New multimedia services, for instance high quality video communications, require even more performance. ISDN is showing the way, and the next technological wave aims for themultimedia-world. This is integrated broadband communications, providing an opportunity to combine all media in a flexible way. The lead technology to implement this is called Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).

European industry and telecoms operators are at the forefront of these technological developments and should reap the benefits.

Europe needs to develop an ATM broadband infrastructure as the backbone of the information society. Multimedia services offered through these networks will support the work and leisure activities of all our citizens.

In many European countries, highly developed broadband distribution already exists in the form of cable and satellite networks, or it is being deployed. Application of currently available sophisticated digital techniques, such as picture compression and digital signal transmission, will easily enable these networks to fulfill mainstream demands for interactive individual information and leisure uses.

The present situation is mainly characterised by national and regional initiatives. The first trials of transnational networks have taken place only recently.

The Group recommends that the Council supports the implementation of the European broadband infrastructure and secure its interconnectivity with the whole of European telecom, cable television and satellite networks.

A European Broadband Steering Committee involving all relevant actors should be set up in order to develop a common vision and to monitor and facilitate the realisation of the overall concept through, in particular, demonstrations and, choice and definition of standards.

Mobile communication: a growing field

Mobile communication is growing at breathtaking speed. The number of mobile telephone subscribers has doubled over the past three years to 8 million. At current growth rates of 30-40%, the Union will soon have 40 million users.

Europe is becoming an important leader in mobile communications through adoption around the world of its standards for digital communications. In particular, GSM is an excellent demonstration of how a common Europe-wide public/private initiative can be successfully transformed into a market driven, job creating operation.

In Germany, the country where GSM is currently having most success, about 30,000 new jobs have been created. On similar assumptions, Europe-wide introduction on the same scale would generate more than 100,000 new jobs.

Satellites: widening the scope of communications

Satellites are mainly used for television broadcasting, Earth observation and telecommunications. The crucial advantage of satellites is their wide geographical coverage without the need for expensive terrestrial networks. Satellites have many advantages for providing rural and remote areas with advanced communications.

Full exploitation of satellites can only be achieved by a new phase in the Union's satellite policy. The objective should be to develop trans-European networks.

With regard to mobile and satellite communications, the Group recommends:

  • a reduction in tariffs for mobile communications;

  • promotion of GSM, in Europe and internationally;

  • the establishment of a regulatory ramework for satellite communications;

  • urging the European satellite industry to develop common priority projects and to participate actively in the development of worldwide systems.

New basic services are needed

New basic services such as e-mail, file transfer and interactive multimedia are needed. The necessary technology is available. New networks are developing, such as ISDN, eliminating the present limitations of the telephone network.

Two basic elements are needed for such services: unambiguous standards and critical mass. The attraction of a telecommunications service depends directly on the number of other compatible users. Thus, a new service cannot really take off until a certain number of customers has subscribed to the service. Once this critical mass has been achieved, growth rates can increase dramatically, as in the case of INTERNET.

INTERNET is based on a world-wide network of networks that is not centrally planned. In fact, nobody owns INTERNET. There are now some 20 million users in more than 100 countries. The network offers electronic mail, discussion fora, information exchange and much more. INTERNET is so big, and growing so fast, that it cannot be ignored. Nevertheless, it has flaws, notably serious security problems. Rather than remaining merely clients, we in Europe should consider following the evolution of INTERNET closely, playing a more active role in the development of interlinkages.

The Group recommends urgent and coherent action at both European and Member State levels to promote the provision and widespread use of standard, trans-European basic services, including electronic mail, file transfer and video services.

The Commission is recommended to initiate the creation of a "European Basic Services Forum" to accelerate the availability of unified standards for basic services.

Significant advantages for the whole economy could be realised quite quickly through extension of Europe-wide compatible basic services.

Blazing the trail - ten applications to launch the information society

Today technology is in search of applications. At the same time, societies are searching for solutions to problems based on intelligent information.

Tariff reductions will facilitate the creation of new applications and so overcome the present low rate of capacity utilisation. Voice lines operate, for instance, an average of 20 minutes in 24 hours, while some value-added network services are only working at 20% of capacity.

However, confident as we are of the necessity to liberate market forces, heightened competition will not by itself produce -or produce too slowly- the critical mass which has the power to drive investment in new networks and services.

We can only create a virtuous circle of supply and demand if a significant number of market testing applications based on information networks and services can be launched across Europe to create critical mass.

We can only create a virtuous circle of supply and demand if a significant number of market testing applications based on information networks and services can be launched across Europe to create critical mass.

Demonstration Function

Initiatives taking the form of experimental applications are the most effective means of addressing the slow take-off of demand and supply. They have a demonstration function which would help to promote theirwider use; they provide an early test bed for suppliers to fine-tune applications to customer requirements, and they can stimulate advanced users, still relatively few in number in Europe as compared to the US.

It is necessary to involve local, metropolitan and regional administrations in their development. Cities can have an extremely important role in generating early demand and also in promoting an awareness among their citizens of the advantages of the newservices. In certain cases, local administrations could demonstrate the benefits by assuming the role of the first mass user.

To be truly effective, such applications need to be launched in real commercial environments, preferably on a large scale. These initiatives are not pilot projects in the traditional sense. The first objective is to test the value to the user, and the economic feasibility of the information systems.

As the examples in the following pages demonstrate, it is possible to identify initiatives which will rapidly develop new applications and markets, while also impacting positively on the creation of new jobs and businesses.

The private sector is ready to embark on the initiatives needed.

Priority applications can be divided in two main blocks, according to final users:

  • the personal home market (interactiv and transaction applications related to teleshopping, telebanking, entertainment, leisure)

  • business and social applications.

Priority applications should also contribute to a number of macro-economic objectives:

  • strengthening industrial competitive ness and promoting the creation of new jobs

  • promoting new forms of work organisation

  • improving quality of life and quality of the environment

  • responding to social needs and raising the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of public services.

Application One
TELEWORKING
More jobs, new jobs, for a mobile society

What should be done? Promote teleworking in homes and satellite offices so that commuters no longer need to travel long distances to work. From there, they can connect electronically to whatever professional environment they need, irrespective of the system in use.

Who will do it? If the telecom operators make available the required networks at competitive prices, the private sector will set up new service companies to supply teleworking support.

Who gains? Companies (both large and SMEs) and public administrations will benefit from productivity gains, increased flexibility, cost savings. For the general public, pollution levels, traffic congestion and energy consumption will be reduced. For employees, more flexible working arrangements will be particularly beneficial for all those tied to the home, and for people in remote locations the narrowing of distances will help cohesion.

Issues to watch? Problems arising from decreased opportunities for social contact and promotion will have to be addressed. Impact on labour legislation and social security provision will need to be assessed.

What target? Create pilot teleworking centres in 20 cities by end 1995 involving at least 20,000 workers. The aim is for 2% of white collar workers to be teleworkers by 1996; 10 million teleworking jobs by the year 2000.

Application Two
DISTANCE LEARNING
Life long learning for a changing society

What should be done? Promote distance learning centres providing courseware, training and tuition services tailored for SMEs, large companies and public administrations. Extend advanced distance learning techniques into schools and colleges.

Who will do it? Given the required network tariffs at competitive prices, industry will set up new service provider companies to supply distance learning services for vocational training. European Commission should support quality standards for programmes and courses and help create a favourable environment. Private sector providers and public authorities will enter the distance education market, offering networked and CD-I and CD-ROM interactive disk based programming and content at affordable prices.

Who gains? Industry (specially SMEs) and public administrations, by cost reductions and optimisation of the use of scarce training and education resources. Employees needing to upgrade their skills by taking advantage of lifelong learning programmes. People tied to the home and in remote locations. Students accessing higher quality teaching.

Issues to Watch? Need to engage in a major effort to train the trainers and expand computer literacy among the teaching profession.

What target? Pilot projects in at least 5 countries by 1995. Distance learning in use by 10% of SMEs and public administrations by 1996. Awareness campaigns among the professional associations and education authorities.

Application Three
A NETWORK FOR UNIVERSITIES AND RESEARCH CENTRES
Networking Europe's brain power

What should be done? Development of a trans-European advanced network (high bandwidth, high definition, carrying interactive multimedia services) linking universities and research centres across Europe, with open access to their libraries.

Who will do it? Providing broadband networks and high speed lines are available at competitive rates, universities and research centres will set up the networks. Private companies, large and small, could also link their laboratories with universities and research centres. A trans-European public library network can also be envisaged.

Who gains? The productivity of research programmes through broader team creation leading to synergies between institutions. Society in general through more efficient diffusion of research findings and knowledge.

Issues to watch? Giving due consideration to IPR protection as the accumulated stock of human knowledge becomes more readily accessible.

What target? Thirty per cent of European universities and research centres linked through advanced communications networks by 1997. Extension to other European countries as this becomes technologically feasible.

Application Four
TELEMATIC SERVICES FOR SMEs
Relaunching a main engine for growth and employment in Europe

What should be done? Promote the widest possible use of telematic services (E-mail, file transfer, EDI, video conferencing, distance learning, etc.) by European SMEs, with links to public authorities, trade associations, customers and suppliers. Raise the awareness of addedvalue services, and communications in general, among SMEs. Increase access to trans-European data networks.

Who will do it? If the necessary ISDN networks are available at competitive rates, the private sector will provide trans-European value-added services tailored for SMEs. Local government, Chambers of Commerce and trades associations linking SMEs will mount programmes for integrating information networks at the localand regional level, promoting awareness campaigns for the services available.

Who gains? SMEs will be able to compete on a more equal basis with larger companies and captive contractor-supplier relationships will be weakened. They will be more competitive, will grow faster and create more jobs. Relationships with administrations will be simpler and more productive. The category will gain in public standing and influence.

What target? Access to Trans-European telematic services for SMEs available by end 1994-1995. 40% of SMEs (firms with more than 50 employees) using telematic networks by 1996. SME links with administration networks prioritised.

Application Five
ROAD TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Electronic roads for better quality of life

What should be done? Establish telematic solutions on a European scale for advanced road traffic management systems and other transport services (driver information, route guidance, fleet management, road pricing, etc.).

Who will do it? European, national and regional administrations, user groups and traffic operators will create a Steering Committee and define a common open system architecture for advanced telematic services with common user interfaces.

Who gains? Drivers, local communities (especially in heavily congested areas) and industry will benefit from reduction in traffic, increased road safety, lower environmental costs, energy and time saving.

What target? Implementation of telematic systems for road traffic management in 10 metropolitan areas and 2,000 km of motorway by 1996. 30 metropolitan areas and the trans-European motorway network by the year 2000.

Application Six
AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
An electronic airway for Europe

What should be done? Create a European Air Traffic Communication System providing ground-ground connections between all European Air Traffic control centres (ATC) and air-ground connections between aeroplanes, ATC-centres across the European Union and the European Civil Aviation Conference, with the aim of achieving a unified trans-European air traffic control system.

Who will do it? The European Council should promote energetically the creation of a reduced number of networked European Air Traffic centres, as defined by EUROCONTROL.

Who gains? The European air transport industry - and its millions of passengers - will benefit from better air traffic management and significantly reduced energy consumption. A safer system, with less congestion and subsequent reductions in time wasted, noise and fume pollution.

Issues to watch? There is a need to co-ordinate closely with the defence sector.

What target? Set up a Steering Committee with representatives of public authorities, civil and military aviation authorities, the air transport industry and unions byend 1994. Definition of standards for communication procedures and the exchange of data and voice messages between ATC-centres as well as between ATC-centres and aeroplanes.

A functioning trans-European system before the year 2000.

Application Seven
HEALTHCARE NETWORKS
Less costly and more effective healthcare systems for Europe's citizens

What should be done? Create a direct communication "network of networks" based on common standards linking general practitioners, hospitals and social centres on a European scale.

Who will do it? The private sector, insurance companies, medical associations and Member State healthcare systems, with the European Union promoting standards and portable applications. Once telecom operators make available the required networks at reduced rates, the private sector will create competitively priced services at a European level, boosting the productivity and cost-effectiveness of the whole healthcare sector.

Who gains? Citizens as patients will benefit from a substantial improvement in healthcare (improvement in diagnosis through on-line access to European specialists, on-line reservation of analysis and hospital services by practitioners extended on European scale, transplant matching, etc.). Tax payers and public administrations will benefit from tighter cost control and cost savings in healthcare spending and a speeding up of reimbursement procedures.

Issues to watch? Privacy and the confidentiality of medical records will need to be safeguarded.

What target? Major private sector health care providers linked on a European scale. First level implementation of networks in Member States linking general practitioners, specialists and hospitals at a regional and national level by end 1995.

Application Eight
ELECTRONIC TENDERING
More effective administration at lower cost

What should be done? Introduction of electronic procedures for public procurement between public administrations and suppliers in Europe followed by the creation of a European Electronic Tendering Network. This programme will function as a strong enabling mechanism for attaining critical mass in the telematic services market in Europe.

Who will do it? European Council and Member States decide to agree on common standards and to introduce a mandatory commitment to electronic handling of information, bidding and payments related to public procurement. Telecom operators and service providers will enableusers to access to the European Electronic Tendering Network.

Who gains? PublicAdministrations will benefit from cost savings in replacing paper handling with electronic handling and from the more competitive environment between suppliers drawn from the wider internal market. Small and medium sized enterprises will benefit from participating in trans-European public procurement and from the diffusion of telematic services.

Issues to watch? Data security, the need to ensure open access particularly for SMEs, to avoid electronic procurement developing into a hidden form of protectionism. Take proper account of similar programmes developed in third countries, particularly the US (CALS).

What target? A critical mass of 10% of awarding authorities using electronic procedures for their procurement needs could be attained in the next two to three years.

Application Nine
TRANS-EUROPEAN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION NETWORK
Better government, cheaper government

What should be done? Interconnected networks between Public Administrations networks in Europe, aiming at providing an effective and less expensive (replacement of paper by electronic means) information interchange. Subsequently extended to link public administrations and European citizens.

Who will do it? European Union and Member States should strengthen and speed up the implementation of the programme for Interchange of Data between Administrations (IDA). The private sector will increase its co-operation with the European Union and Member States in defining technical solutions for the provision of interoperable services and interconnectable networks, while supporting national and local authorities in the testing and implementation of networks and services for citizens.

Who gains? The unification process for the single market, with general benefits in lower costs and better relations between public administrations and European citizens.

What target? Implementation of interconnected networks allowing interchange in the tax, customs and excise, statistical, social security, health care domains, etc., by 1995-96.

Application Ten
CITY INFORMATION HIGHWAYS
Bringing the information society into the home

What should be done? Set up networks providing households with a network access system and the means of using on-line multimedia and entertainment services on a local, regional, and national and international basis.

Who will do it? Groups of content and service providers (broadcasters, publishers), network operators (telecoms organisations, cable), system suppliers/integrators (e.g. consumer electronic industry). Local and regional authorities, citizens groups, chambers of commerce and industry, will have very important roles to play.

Who gains? Consumers will enjoy early experience of complex new services, particulary multimedia services, and will be able to express their preferences in the fields of entertainment (video on demand), transaction-oriented services (banking, home shopping etc.) as well as gaining access to information services and teleworking or telelearning.

Public authorities will gain experience with issues such as privacy, IPR protection, standardisation which will be helpful in defining a single legal and regulatory environment.

Private sector participants will gain early hands-on experience of consumer preferences for programmes, software and services. User interfaces can be tested and improved in practice.

What target? Install and operate in up to five European cities with up to 40,000 households per city by 1997.


Chapter 5
Financing the information society - a task for the private sector

It is neither possible nor necessary at this stage to be precise about the amount of investment that will be generated by the development of the information infrastructure and related services and applications. Analyses made of the US market remain highly questionable, although there is no doubt that the total investment required over the next 5 to 10 years will be considerable.

The Group believes the creation of the information society in Europe should be entrusted to the private sector and to market forces.

The Group believes the creation of the information society in Europe should be entrusted to the private sector and to market forces.

Private capital will be available to fund new telecoms services and infrastructures providing that the different elements of this Report's Action Plan are implemented so that:

  • market liberalisation is fast and credible

  • rules for interoperability and reciprocal access are set

  • tariffs are adjusted

  • the regulatory framework is established

There will be no need for public subsidies, because sufficient confidence will have been established to attract the required investment from private sources.

Ultimately, it is market growth that is perceived as the real guarantee for private investors, rendering subsidies and monopolies superfluous.

Public investment will assume a role, but not by any increase in the general level of public spending - rather by a refocusing of existing expenditure. Indeed, some of the investment that public authorities will have to undertake to develop applications in areas of their own responsibility will generate productivity gains and an improvement in the quality of services that should, if properly handled, lead to savings.

In addition to some refocusing of expenditure on R&D, modest amounts of public money may also be useful to support awareness campaigns mainly directed at small and medium sized businesses and individual consumers.

The Group recommends refocusing existing public funding more specifically to target the requirements of the information society. At the Union level, this may require some reorientation of current allocations under such headings as the Fourth Framework Programme for research and development and the Structural Funds.

The same is true for expenditure at the European Union which can achieve important results by a better focusing of existing resources, including finance available under both the Fourth Framework Programme funding R&D, and under the Structural Funds.

The Commission has also proposed limited support for some of the services and applications included in the Group's Action Plan from funds linked to the promotion of trans-European networks. These proposals deserve support.


Chapter 6
Follow-up

With this Report the Group has completed its mandate and provided recommendations for action. Our recommendations should be regarded as a coherent whole, the full benefits of which can only be reaped if action is taken in all areas.

Given the urgency and importance of the tasks ahead, the Group believes that at Union level there must be one Council capable of dealing with the full range of issues associated with the information society. With this in mind, each Member States may wish to nominate a single minister to represent it in a Council of Ministers dedicated to the information society. The Commission should act similarly.

The Group calls for the establishment by the Commission of a Board composed of eminent figures from all sectors concerned, including the social partners, to work on the framework for implementing the information society and to promote public awareness of its opportunities and challenges. This Board should report at regular intervals to the institutions of the Union on progress made on the implementation of the recommendations contained in this report.


An Action Plan - summary of recommendations

Regulatory Framework

Evolving the regulatory domain

Member States should accelerate the ongoing process of liberalisation of the Telecom sector by :

  • opening up to competition infrastructures and services still in the monopoly area

  • removing non-commercial political burdens and budgetary constraints imposed on telecommunications operators

  • setting clear timetables and deadlines for the implementation of practical measures to achieve these goals.

An authority should be established at European level whose terms of reference will require prompt attention.

Interconnection and Interoperability

Interconnection of networks and interoperability of services and applications should be primary Union objectives. The European standardisation process should be reviewed in order to increase its speed and responsiveness to markets.

Tariffs

As a matter of urgency the international, long distance and leased line tariffs should be adjusted to bring these down into line with rates practised in other advanced industrialised regions. The adjustment should be accompanied by the fair sharing of public service obligations among operators.

Critical Mass

Public awareness should be promoted. Particular attention should be paid to the small and medium-sized business sector, public administrations and the younger generation.

Worldwide Dimension

The openness of the European market should find its counterpart in markets and networks of other regions of the world. It is of paramount importance for Europe that adequate steps should be taken to guarantee equal access.

Completing the agenda

The Information Society is global. Union action should aim to establish a common and agreed regulatory framework for the protection of intellectual property rights, privacy and security of information in Europe and, where appropriate, internationally.

IPRs

Intellectual property protection must rise to the new challenges of globalisation and multimedia, and must continue to have a high priority at both European and international levels.

Privacy

Without the legal security of a Union-wide approach, lack of consumer confidence will certainly undermine the rapid development of the information society. Given the importance and sensitivity of the privacy issue, a fast decision from Member States is required on the Commission's proposed Directive setting out general principles of data protection.

Electronic protection, legal protection and security

Work at the European level on electronic and legal protection as well as security should be accelerated.

Media ownership

Urgent attention should be given to the question of how we can avoid divergent national legislation on media ownership undermining the internal market. Effective rules must emerge to protect pluralism and competition.

Competition

Competition is a key element in Europe's strategy. The application of competition rules should reflect the reality of the newly emerging global markets and the speed of change in the environment.

Building blocks

Networks

Priority has to be given to the extension of the availability of EURO-ISDN, in line with current Commission proposals, and reductions in tariffs to foster the market.

The Council should support the implementation of the European Broadband Infrastructure and secure its interconnectivity with the whole of European telecom, cable television and satellite networks.

A European Broadband Steering Committee involving all relevant actors should be set up in order to develop a common vision and to monitor and facilitate the realisation of the overall concept through, in particular, demonstrations, and choice and definition of standards.

With regard to mobile and satellite communications :

  • tariffs for mobile communications should be reduced

  • GSM should be promoted in Europe and internationally

  • a regulatory framework for satellite communications should be established

  • the European satellite industry should be urged to develop common priority projects and to participate actively in the development of world-wide systems.

Basic services

The provision and widespread use of standard trans-European basic services, including electronic mail, file transfer, video services, should be promoted by urgent and coherent action at both the European and Member State levels.

The Commission should initiate the creation of a " European Basic Services Forum" to accelerate the availability of unified standards for basic services.

Applications

Initiatives in the application domain are the most effective means of addressing the slow take-off of demand and supply. They have a demonstration function which would help promoting their use. The Group has identified the following initiatives :

Financing

The creation of the information society should be entrusted to the private sector and to the market forces.

The existing public funding should be refocused more specifically to target the requirements of the information society. At the Union level, this may require some reorientation of current allocations under such headings as the Fourth Framework Programme for research and development and the Structural Funds.

Follow-up

Given the urgency and importance of the tasks ahead, there must be, at Union level, one Council capable of dealing with the full range of issues associated with the information society. With this in mind, each Member State may wish to nominate a single minister to represent it in a Council of Ministers dedicated to the information society. The Commission should act similarly.

A Board composed of eminent figures from all sectors concerned, including the social partners, should be established by the Commission to work on the framework for implementing the information society and to promote public awareness of its opportunities and challenges. This Board should report at regular intervals to the institutions of the Union on progress made on the implementation of the recommendations contained in this Report.

postrOLXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate dLUrOLIt+dcntry(m f!iZ`G2u0 Aurl Nhttp://www.eff.org/pub/Publications/John_Perry_Barlow/barlow_0296.declarationmime text/htmlhntt"28c9d4-1f2e-311c3f50"hvrsdata Date: Fri, 9 Feb 1996 17:16:35 +0100 To: barlow@eff.org From: John Perry Barlow Subject: A Cyberspace Independence Declaration Yesterday, that great invertebrate in the White House signed into the law the Telecom "Reform" Act of 1996, while Tipper Gore took digital photographs of the proceedings to be included in a book called "24 Hours in Cyberspace." I had also been asked to participate in the creation of this book by writing something appropriate to the moment. Given the atrocity that this legislation would seek to inflict on the Net, I decided it was as good a time as any to dump some tea in the virtual harbor. After all, the Telecom "Reform" Act, passed in the Senate with only 5 dissenting votes, makes it unlawful, and punishable by a $250,000 to say "shit" online. Or, for that matter, to say any of the other 7 dirty words prohibited in broadcast media. Or to discuss abortion openly. Or to talk about any bodily function in any but the most clinical terms. It attempts to place more restrictive constraints on the conversation in Cyberspace than presently exist in the Senate cafeteria, where I have dined and heard colorful indecencies spoken by United States senators on every occasion I did. This bill was enacted upon us by people who haven't the slightest idea who we are or where our conversation is being conducted. It is, as my good friend and Wired Editor Louis Rossetto put it, as though "the illiterate could tell you what to read." Well, fuck them. Or, more to the point, let us now take our leave of them. They have declared war on Cyberspace. Let us show them how cunning, baffling, and powerful we can be in our own defense. I have written something (with characteristic grandiosity) that I hope will become one of many means to this end. If you find it useful, I hope you will pass it on as widely as possible. You can leave my name off it if you like, because I don't care about the credit. I really don't. But I do hope this cry will echo across Cyberspace, changing and growing and self-replicating, until it becomes a great shout equal to the idiocy they have just inflicted upon us. I give you... A Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace Governments of the Industrial World, you weary giants of flesh and steel, I come from Cyberspace, the new home of Mind. On behalf of the future, I ask you of the past to leave us alone. You are not welcome among us. You have no sovereignty where we gather. We have no elected government, nor are we likely to have one, so I address you with no greater authority than that with which liberty itself always speaks. I declare the global social space we are building to be naturally independent of the tyrannies you seek to impose on us. You have no moral right to rule us nor do you possess any methods of enforcement we have true reason to fear. Governments derive their just powers from the consent of the governed. You have neither solicited nor received ours. We did not invite you. You do not know us, nor do you know our world. Cyberspace does not lie within your borders. Do not think that you can build it, as though it were a public construction project. You cannot. It is an act of nature and it grows itself through our collective actions. You have not engaged in our great and gathering conversation, nor did you create the wealth of our marketplaces. You do not know our culture, our ethics, or the unwritten codes that already provide our society more order than could be obtained by any of your impositions. You claim there are problems among us that you need to solve. You use this claim as an excuse to invade our precincts. Many of these problems don't exist. Where there are real conflicts, where there are wrongs, we will identify them and address them by our means. We are forming our own Social Contract . This governance will arise according to the conditions of our world, not yours. Our world is different. Cyberspace consists of transactions, relationships, and thought itself, arrayed like a standing wave in the web of our communications. Ours is a world that is both everywhere and nowhere, but it is not where bodies live. We are creating a world that all may enter without privilege or prejudice accorded by race, economic power, military force, or station of birth. We are creating a world where anyone, anywhere may express his or her beliefs, no matter how singular, without fear of being coerced into silence or conformity. Your legal concepts of property, expression, identity, movement, and context do not apply to us. They are based on matter, There is no matter here. Our identities have no bodies, so, unlike you, we cannot obtain order by physical coercion. We believe that from ethics, enlightened self-interest, and the commonweal, our governance will emerge . Our identities may be distributed across many of your jurisdictions. The only law that all our constituent cultures would generally recognize is the Golden Rule. We hope we will be able to build our particular solutions on that basis. But we cannot accept the solutions you are attempting to impose. In the United States, you have today created a law, the Telecommunications Reform Act, which repudiates your own Constitution and insults the dreams of Jefferson, Washington, Mill, Madison, DeToqueville, and Brandeis. These dreams must now be born anew in us. You are terrified of your own children, since they are natives in a world where you will always be immigrants. Because you fear them, you entrust your bureaucracies with the parental responsibilities you are too cowardly to confront yourselves. In our world, all the sentiments and expressions of humanity, from the debasing to the angelic, are parts of a seamless whole, the global conversation of bits. We cannot separate the air that chokes from the air upon which wings beat. In China, Germany, France, Russia, Singapore, Italy and the United States, you are trying to ward off the virus of liberty by erecting guard posts at the frontiers of Cyberspace. These may keep out the contagion for a small time, but they will not work in a world that will soon be blanketed in bit-bearing media. Your increasingly obsolete information industries would perpetuate themselves by proposing laws, in America and elsewhere, that claim to own speech itself throughout the world. These laws would declare ideas to be another industrial product, no more noble than pig iron. In our world, whatever the human mind may create can be reproduced and distributed infinitely at no cost. The global conveyance of thought no longer requires your factories to accomplish. These increasingly hostile and colonial measures place us in the same position as those previous lovers of freedom and self-determination who had to reject the authorities of distant, uninformed powers. We must declare our virtual selves immune to your sovereignty, even as we continue to consent to your rule over our bodies. We will spread ourselves across the Planet so that no one can arrest our thoughts. We will create a civilization of the Mind in Cyberspace. May it be more humane and fair than the world your governments have made before. Davos, Switzerland February 8, 1996 **************************************************************** John Perry Barlow, Cognitive Dissident Co-Founder, Electronic Frontier Foundation Home(stead) Page: http://www.eff.org/~barlow Message Service: 800/634-3542 Barlow in Meatspace Today (until Feb 12): Cannes, France Hotel Martinez: (33) 92 98 73 00, Fax: (33) 93 39 67 82 Coming soon to: Amsterdam 2/13-14, Winston-Salem 2/15, San Francisco 2/16-20, San Jose 2/21, San Francisco 2/21-23, Pinedale, Wyoming In Memoriam, Dr. Cynthia Horner and Jerry Garcia ***************************************************************** It is error alone which needs the support of government. Truth can stand by itself. --Thomas Jefferson, Notes on Virginia postG2XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate G2 Aд+? A.ntry(ӭ(ONղb_pqddurl >http://europa.eu.int/comm/dg05/soc-dial/info_soc/index_en.htmmime text/htmlhvrsdata Information Society

European FlagEuropa
The European Commission

Social Policy

Directorate General V

Search

Index
What's New
Key Issues

Mail-box

Site map

Copyright
deenfr


Information Society


News

Follow-up to the Jobs in the Information Society Communication (25/3/99)


Documents

Job opportunities in the Information Society
Exploiting the potential of the information revolution
Job opportunities in the Information Society: Exploiting the Potential of the Information revolution (COM (1998) 590 final)
Available in PDF format in: DA, DE, EL, EN, ES, FI, FR, IT, NL, PT, SV
The Social and Labour Market Dimension of the Information Society, People First - The Next Steps
COM(97)390 of 23 July 1997
Available in PDF format in: DA, DE, EL, EN, ES, FI, FR, IT, NL, PT, SV
Green Paper - Living and working in the Information Society - People First
COM(96)389final adopted on 24 July 1996


Feel free to visit the "Information Society Project Office" site

http://www.ispo.cec.be

(ISPO is the official Internet site of DG III - Industry - and DGXIII - Telecommunications,
Information Market and Exploitation of Research).


Backtop

postղbXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ӭղb Y@+Bntry(s[/SҥDq`OG[\Rurl ,http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/SSG/ih01650e.htmlmime text/htmlhvrsdata Preparing Canada for a Digital World

Industry Canada Information Highway Strategis
HelpWhat's NewSitemapFeedbackAbout UsFrançais
GO TO    Main Menu
  Business Support and Financing
  Information Highway Advisory Council (IHAC)
Search Strategis
Author - Industry Canada
Publication Date - 1997-10-08

Preparing Canada for
a Digital World



FINAL REPORT OF
THE INFORMATION HIGHWAY
ADVISORY COUNCIL


Preface

1  Toward a Society Built on Knowledge

2  Building Canada's Information Infrastructure

3  The Internet: Advancing the Information Highway

4  Access: Cornerstone of the Information Society

5  Canadian Content: Creating an Information Highway for Canadians

6  An Information Highway for Jobs and Growth

7  People and the Information Society: Lifelong Learning and the Workplace

8  Government as a Model User

9  Conclusion: The Road to the Future

Annexes

  1. Reference
  2. Key Indicators for Benchmarking the Development of Canada's Information Highway, by Max E. Melnyk
  3. Canada's Progress toward a Knowledge Society



Preface


Help     What's New     Sitemap     Feedback     About Us     Français     Top of Page

Canada
http://strategis.ic.gc.ca

postSXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate sS G+E\ntry($J= NߨSu`X ESA7Murl 'http://info.isoc.org/internet-history/mime text/htmlhvrsdata Internet Society (ISOC) All About The Internet: History of the Internet
Internet Society All About ISOC All About the Internet Search/Site Map
Organization Members Members Only Home
Join Feedback
All About the Internet

History of the Internet




Internet Histories:

  • A Brief History of the Internet

    by those who made the history, including  Barry M. Leiner , Vinton G. Cerf , David D. Clark, Robert E. KahnLeonard Kleinrock,   Daniel C. Lynch,    Jon Postel,   Lawrence G. Roberts,  Stephen Wolff

  • Brief History of the Internet

    Excellent narative of the Internet and Related Networks by Vint Cerf

  • Hobbes' Internet Timeline

    An Internet timeline highlighting some of the key events and technologies which helped shape the Internet as we know it today.

  • Where Wizards Stay Up Late: The Origins of the Internet
    by Katie Hafner and Matthew Lyon
    ISBN: 0-684-83267-4 (Simon & Schuster, 1996)
    http://www.fixe.com/wizard/wizards.html

    Brief Abstract:
    This book relates the early history of the ARPANET, the predecessor to the Internet, beginning with work supported by the US Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) to explore methods for interconnecting heterogeneous COMPUTERS across a common, packet-switched network. As the story unfolds, eventually, multiple packet networks enter into the picture and the Internet emerges as the result of research to find ways of interconnecting heterogeneous NETWORKS to one another to form a seamless INTERNET.

  • PBS Life on the Internet Timeline

    Site also includes links, stories, an a beginners guide to the Internet

  • PBS's Nerds 2.0.1

    A follow-up to the original...

by Vinton Cerf, as told to Bernard Aboba.  Article from  "The Online User's Encyclopedia," by Bernard Aboba.

From W3C,  this document dates from 1995 and has not been updated. The history is of course still valid though not up to date. Some links may not work.   Is a monthly history list  from 1980 to October 1995.

Timeline from June 1975 to February 1998  showing when terms, concepts, stories, and people were first mentioned. 

 

__________________________________________________________________


11150 Sunset Hills Road, Suite 100, Reston, VA, USA 20190-5321
Tel: +1 703 326 9880 Fax: +1 703 326 9881

4, rue des Falaises, CH-1205, Geneva, Switzerland
Tel: +41 22 807 1444 Fax: +41 22 807 1445

This document <http://www.isoc.org/internet-history/index.shtml>
was last updated Monday, 19-Jul-1999 15:23:36 EDT.
Copyright ©1999 Internet Society. All Rights Reserved.

Webmaster@ISOC.ORG
Site Credits

postߨSXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate $JߨS cH+H771ntry(,VHe֋w!.1b"VA5;url http://www.isoc.org/mime text/htmlhvrsdata "Internet Society" (ISOC): Welcome Internet Society (ISOC) Web Site
The Internet Society About ISOC About the Net Search/Site Map
Org. Members Members Only Join
What's New
Welcome to the Internet Society!
Headlines

Domain Name Dispute Policy Approved

NCDNHC Elects DNSO Names Council Representatives

Events
NDSS 2000 N D S S  2 0 0 0

Sponsorship Opportunities
Online Registration Now Open
San Diego, California
February 2-4, 2000
INET 2000 I N E T  2 0 0 0

Sponsorship Opportunities
Call for Abstracts Now Open
Yokohama, Japan
July 18-21, 2000

Features

Welcome ISOC's newest organization member:
Orientation Global Network, Inc.
http://www.orientation.com

OnTheInternet
An International bimonthly publication for ISOC members.

ThinkQuest

Awards one million dollars in scholarships for educational web design.

BABEL
A joint ISOC/Alis Technologies site on the Internationalisation of the Internet.

The Internet is for Everyone

ISOC Mission Statement

Discussion Groups
ISOC Conferences
Join an ISOC Chapter
ISOC Press Info
ISOC Publications
Organization Member 'Spotlight'
Internet Y2k Campaign
History of the Internet
Postel Memorial Funds

Web Sites of Related Organizations Involved in the Evolution and Stability of the Internet
IETF IAB IRTF IANA ISTF


The Internet Society is a non-profit, non-governmental, international, professional membership organization. It focuses on: standards, education, and policy issues. Its more than 150 organization and 8,600 individual members in over 170 nations worldwide represent a veritable who's who of the Internet community. You should be a member, too.


11150 Sunset Hills Road
Suite 100
Reston, VA 20190-5321
USA
TEL: +1 703 326 9880
FAX: +1 703 326 9881

4, rue des Falaises
CH-1205 Geneva
Switzerland
TEL: +41 22 807 1444
FAX: +41 22 807 1445

Feedback



__________________________________________________________________

Copyright ©1999 Internet Society. All Rights Reserved.
Last Modified Wednesday, 01-Sep-1999 12:37:16 EDT by Webmaster@ISOC.ORG.
Site Credits

post1bXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate ,1b ?ʹJ+JA5@zntry(imd?5o ՘2r$1a9 /Idurl >http://www.oreilly.com/people/staff/stevet/netfuture/faq.htmlmime text/htmlhvrsdata FAQ on Computerized Technology and Human Responsibility
  • Goto NETFUTURE main page
  • COMPUTERIZED TECHNOLOGY AND HUMAN RESPONSIBILITY

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Written by Stephen L. Talbott (stevet@ora.com)
    Last Updated:  January 30, 1997
    

    It is not particularly odd to list common questions about technology and human responsibility. The odd thing would be to answer them!--or, rather, to propose a set of *canonical* answers.

    The answers put forth here most definitely are not canonical. Think of this FAQ instead as a template, for which you must substitute your own answers. This is not to suggest a rootless relativism, but only to acknowledge what holds true in all matters of moral responsibility: every individual must knit his own pattern into the overall, harmonious fabric of truth, beauty, and goodness.

    Portions of the following are adapted from the author's book, "The Future Does Not Compute -- Transcending the Machines in Our Midst," with kind permission of the publisher, O'Reilly & Associates. Other portions are adapted from a work in progress called "Daily Meditations for the Computer-entranced." Yet other portions are completely off-the-wall.

     

    CONTENTS

    The Challenge of Intelligent Tools
    ----------------------------------

    1. Does computerized technology threaten our future?
    1. What is an example of this threat?
    1. Do computers extend our capabilities?
    1. Were the printing press and other earlier technologies risk-free?
    1. Is the computer just another tool?
    1. What gift does the computer bring us?
    1. Does more sophisticated, user-friendly software reduce the risks?
    1. Are there still risks when the computer's active intelligence recedes into the background, acting as a relatively passive conduit for human communication?

    Technological Neutrality and Human Freedom
    ------------------------------------------

    1. Isn't technology Neutral? 'Guns don't kill people; people do'
    1. Are we free?
    1. Can you and I do anything to alter significantly the technological juggernaut that is transforming society?

    The Net and Personal Psychology
    -------------------------------

    1. Does the Net help us to overcome prejudice by putting race, religion, age, gender, and handicap out of sight?
    1. Does the Net help us be more vulnerable to each other?
    1. Haven't Net courtship and the infamous flame proven that computer-mediated communication allows intimate personal exchange?
    1. Is projection a problem on the Net?
    1. What is the antidote to projection?
    1. Does the Net make us scatter-brained?

    Education
    ---------

    1. Children in today's world need to be familiar with computers, don't they?
    1. What should we teach high-school students about computers?
    1. Isn't the Internet irreplaceable as a source of information?
    1. Why not use the Internet to bring world-class science into the schoolhouse?
    1. Can't we use the Internet to help students become world citizens?
    1. Do CD-ROMs and nature videos instill a love of nature in children?
    1. Why not use the Internet to help children learn foreign languages?
    1. Must we get school children onto the Net in order to prepare them for 21st century jobs?

    Media
    -----

    1. Will the computer deliver us from the television wasteland?
    1. Doesn't the computer's interactivity make it superior to television?

    Information
    -----------

    1. Is more information the key to our problems?
    1. Will computers give us mastery over information?

    Community, Business, and Economics
    ----------------------------------

    1. Are computer networks strengthening community?
    1. Who are the corporate bad guys?
    1. Will computers support centralized authority or undermine it?
    1. Can there be tyrannical, non-centralized authority?

    Censorship
    ----------

    1. Why is there pressure for censorship on the Net?
    1. As far as children are concerned, isn't it easy enough to assign responsibility for their online protection to their parents?
    1. Why do you say the Net is corrosive of culture?
    1. Do we have an absolute right of free speech?

    Privacy and Security
    --------------------

    1. Can the battle for privacy be won in cyberspace?
    1. Where is the battle for security being fought?
    1. So how can we achieve a desirable privacy and security?

    Computer Applications and Hardware
    ----------------------------------

    1. When will technical progress carry us beyond computer performance and memory limitations?

    Responses to the Challenge of Technology
    ----------------------------------------

    1. Isn't timidity in the face of today's technological revolution just a matter of humans feeling threatened by rapid change? And won't the successful survivors be those who vigorously adapt?
    1. Should we smash the intelligent machines around us?
    1. Which, finally, is more justified: optimism or pessimism?
     

    ANSWERS

     
    THE CHALLENGE OF INTELLIGENT TOOLS
     
    1. Does computerized technology threaten our future?
    Yes--but not, as the old science fiction chestnut suggested, because the computer might turn traitor and rebel against its masters. The real danger is that the computer will seduce us-- seduce us into becoming like it. It does this by mimicking human intelligence--but only those aspects of our intelligence that run mechanically and unthinkingly. By willingly meshing our lives with the technological surround, abandoning our own highest functioning, we learn to sleepwalk in synchrony with our machines.

    We don't *have* to sleepwalk, but as one social function after another is transferred to the computer, the invitation is a seductive one, calling for the conscious exercise of personal responsibility in resistance to it.

    Return to table of contents

    1. What is an example of this threat?
    If you fall into a financial crisis and apply for a loan, not even a personal interview is any longer necessary. It is a "transaction," captured by transaction processing software and based solely upon standard, online data. Everything that once followed from the qualities of a personal encounter--everything that could make for an exceptional case--has now disappeared from the picture. The applicant is wholly sketched when the data of his past have been subjected to automatic logic. Any hopeful glimmer, filtering toward the sympathetic eye of a supportive fellow human from a future only now struggling toward birth, is lost in the darkness between bits of data.

    In other words, the human being as a unique and incalculable individual begins to disappear between the cracks of automated logic.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Do computers extend our capabilities?
    Certainly. For example, the computer's ability to calculate and analyze complex data vastly exceeds our capability. The cautionary note that goes along with fact has to do with the one-sided tendencies that have progressively taken hold of our culture since the dawn of the scientific era--tendencies to substitute analysis and calculation for understanding and meaning. Computers, you might say, are the near perfection of our one-sidedness. That is why they present us with risk on every hand--but certainly not with intrinsic "evil." One- sidedness can be brought into balance through proper effort.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Were the printing press and other earlier technologies risk-free?
    The common assumption is that those who worry about computer risks must uncritically embrace earlier technologies. This is false. The computer can be seen as extending the risks of the printing press further in the same direction: the word becomes still more detached from the human speaker and objectified as "information." Where once we could take unhealthy pride in the wealth of knowledge stored on our bookshelves, now we can take pride in what our databases and access tools give us, as if this afforded understanding. The word becomes an object to be massaged by word-processing software, automatically stored and forwarded, analyzed, and scanned, all without any depth of penetration by either an originating or receiving consciousness. But without such penetration, the word is dead.

    There is no way to escape the difficult challenge of using technology responsibly, regardless of which technologies we choose.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Is the computer, then, just another tool?
    Not really. The computer is a vastly more potent tool than, say, a hammer. It is true that, if I take everything for a nail and let the hammer run riot in my hands, I have forsaken responsibility. But I am not likely to mistake a hammer for a thinking device. Computers are highly adaptive, universal machines, and when we bring to them a willingness to sacrifice our own functioning to that of our tools, we risk sacrificing, not just one particular capacity, but the entire field of human responsibility.

    Return to table of contents

    1. What gift does the computer bring us?
    The primary--and in the deepest sense the only--gift of every tool is its resistance to the human good. In overcoming this resistance we advance as human beings. The painful results of my indiscipline with my hammer invite inner growth, which is the only enduring gift of the tool. After all, which is of more lasting value: the cabinet I build with nails and eventually leave behind, or the inner mastery I gain through struggling with myself, hammer in hand--a mastery I will carry as healing capacity wherever I go in an overwrought world?

    By claiming to be master of all tools, the computer challenges us to contend for our own mastery on all fronts. Failing the challenge, we lose ourselves; rising to the challenge, we gain ourselves. The computer is our hope if we can accept it as our enemy; as our friend, it will destroy us.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Does more sophisticated, user-friendly software reduce the risks?
    No, it increases the risks. Currently, phone answering systems ask us to punch numbers or pronounce single words, thereby routing us to a human operator who can deal with our substantive concerns. With better voice recognition software, that operator will become a software agent that attempts to hold a conversation with us. If you thought the number-punching phase was irritating, wait until you have to communicate the heart of your business to a computer with erratic hearing, a doubtful vocabulary of 400 words, and the compassion of a granite monolith!

    In other words, as software advances, it is applied to more critical activities, where the risks are greater. The technical opportunity to become friendlier at one level is at the same time an opportunity to become unfriendly on a more decisive level. We must be more awake, more alert to our machine-transcending responsibilities, when dealing with the more advanced software, precisely because the advanced capabilities invite us to let go of yet higher human capacities.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Are there still risks when the computer's active intelligence recedes into the background, acting as a relatively passive conduit for human communication?
    There are many risks, some of which we'll touch on later. A primary concern is the pervasive habit of scanning induced in us by computers. One user boasted of being able to read, assess, and discard a screenful of text in about a second. How much attention can he direct toward the human speaker who uttered the words? Words that stand alone, separate from the person attempting to express himself, are words that have already been cut off from any depth of meaning. We assess screenfuls of text at breakneck speed only by skittering over the logical surface of the words, without any contemplative assimilation.

    The correlative act of responsibility is to bend our consciousness toward the speaker. Try to find a sympathetic connection with him, and to understand who is expressing himself in the words. Of course, it is a symptom of the information age that the speaker often cannot even be identified, and that most of the verbal flood inundating us hardly seems worth giving that sort of respect to. But it is far healthier to seek escape from the flood than to accept it with a habit of trivial regard. We end up trivializing each other, while worshiping dead words (called "information") that we pay no attention to.

    Return to table of contents

     
    TECHNOLOGICAL NEUTRALITY AND HUMAN FREEDOM
     
    1. Isn't technology neutral? 'Guns don't kill people; people do'
    Yes, only people can do bad things. But every technology already embodies certain of our choices. A gun, after all, was pretty much designed to kill living organisms at a distance, which gives it a different nature from, say, a pair of binoculars.

    The computer takes this much further, since its whole purpose is to bear our meanings and intentions with a degree of explicitness, subtlety, intricacy, and completeness unimaginable in earlier machines. Every executing program is a condensation of certain human thinking processes. At a more general level, the computer embodies our resolve to approach much of life with a programmatic or recipe-like (algorithmic) mindset. That resolve, expressed in the machinery, is far from innocent or neutral when, for example, we begin to adapt group behavior to programmed constraints.

    So we meet ourselves--our deepest tendencies, whether savory or unsavory, conscious or unconscious--in the things we have made. And, as always, the weight of accumulated choices begins to bind us. Our freedom is never absolute, but is conditioned by what we have made of ourselves and our world so far. The toxic materials I spread over my yard yesterday restrict my options today.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Are we free?
    When it comes to human behavior, we cannot both see a pattern of causation and remain trapped in it exactly as before. The seeing itself is a decisive new element in the pattern. The more fully we understand how our artifacts dictate social structures and behavior, the more we are in a position to alter the terms of the dictation.

    The strict determinist's only hope for truth is the hope that the truth has wholly eluded us--that we stand subject to determination by powers we can never penetrate with understanding. In other words, it is the paradoxical hope that we can never know ourselves to be determined.

    But it also needs saying that every act we undertake in the world, every reshaping of the stuff of the world, is a weight upon the future. Actions have consequences. The solvent dumped in my yard last year affects my gardening possibilities this year. Everything I do today constrains me tomorrow. The intelligent machinery we have previously programmed and set in motion continues to run on by itself according to those past determinations, binding us every more tightly and inviting us to abdicate our freedom in the current moment.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Can you and I do anything to alter significantly the technological juggernaut that is transforming society?
    Perhaps you and I can only alter things in a minuscule way. But whatever that small arena of possibility, it is the *only* arena within which our distinctively human activity takes place. Precisely so far as we do not strive to affect things, we've abandoned our humanity; we are sleepwalking with our machines.

    Return to table of contents

     
    THE NET AND PERSONAL PSYCHOLOGY
     
    1. Does the Net help us to overcome prejudice by putting race, religion, age, gender, and handicap out of sight?
    We do not conquer our prejudices by putting all foreignness out of sight. The things we prefer to keep out of sight are, in fact, the things that will subsequently rule us most effectively from our subconscious. The roots of prejudice lie in the human being, and cannot be eradicated with a trick of technology. Certainly we cannot be more fully human toward each other by being less human, less there, less in view.

    Moreover, we discriminate against each other quite as easily on the basis of belief and other intangibles as on the basis of appearance. As long as anything of the other person remains, there's something to discriminate against. If prejudice easily "disappears" across the Net, it is because the person himself easily disappears. But getting rid of the other person in this way begins to sound suspiciously like "termination with extreme prejudice."

    Return to table of contents

    1. Does the Net help us be more vulnerable to each other?
    More like the opposite. The oft-stated notion that, because we can readily escape bad scenes with a click of the mouse, we are freer to be vulnerable is just nonsense. To be vulnerable is, by definition, to be at risk. One woman was quoted on this matter as saying, "Online I can go to a singles bar, and if anything starts going wrong, Poof!, I'm outta there." Some vulnerability. Some community.

    It's true that the wounded soul may sometimes need shelter from the normal buffetings of life, and we sometimes hear that the Net provides such shelter. But we should at least realize that the shelter is a symptom of life not yet fully engaged rather than a testimonial to our grandest victories.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Haven't Net courtship and the infamous flame proven that computer- mediated communication allows intimate personal exchange?
    Certainly, as more and more of our activities are carried out via the Net, that's going to be where we meet people, and some of those meetings will lead to real friendship and marriage. But this doesn't tell us much about the overall effects the electronic media are having upon relationships.

    The error most people make here is to assume that strong emotion is a sign that people are making deep, human contact. The usual reality is nearly the opposite of this. I may react with explosive feeling when my car won't start on a cold morning, but this isn't a sign that I've got a good relationship going with the engine. If anything, my reaction makes it even more difficult to hear what the engine may be "telling" me. Much the same goes for the so-called Net flame. The flamer generally isn't communicating with anyone at all. He's completely wrapped up in himself.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Is projection a problem on the Net?
    If a square foot or two of screen presents us, as is so often said, with the entire world, then that world is hugely reduced and abstract, leaving us to "fill in the picture" from our subconscious. The blankness of the Net, the distance between conversants, the shifting personas, the dizzying succession of far-flung connections, the pitifully narrow channel for shared activities--perhaps even the hypnotic qualities of the computer screen itself--all powerfully invite us to project ourselves into the electronic ether under the illusion that we are getting to know each other.

    One classic expression of psychological projection is head-over- heels infatuation. We need not be surprised, therefore, at the unsuppressed infatuational energy--the downright frenzy--amid which the Internet has burst upon the national scene over the past few years. It has not been a time of clear-sighted assessment.

    Return to table of contents

    1. What is the antidote to projection?
    Know thyself. This, of course, is exactly what the infinite, distracting capabilities of the Net tend to prevent us from doing.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Does the Net make us scatter-brained?
    It doesn't *make* us do anything, but the temptation toward scattering is powerful. Just consider the frantic concern for up-to-the-minute recency (as if any sort of profound wisdom is dependent upon having this week's data); the daily flooding of mailboxes; the habit of scanning newsgroups and messages at breakneck pace; the fragmentation of the workday by continual email intrusions; the empty chasing of linkage trails, increasingly prevalent in both the writing and reading of hypertext documents; the widespread encouragement of fear about "missing the party"; and the lottery-like hope of discovering "great finds" on the Net.

    A stance of responsibility can only resist these invitations to scatter ourselves in cyberspace. We must ask, "How can we recollect ourselves, find our own centers, and subordinate the online carnival--so far as we choose to deal with it at all--to our deeper, consciously pursued purposes."

    Return to table of contents

     
    EDUCATION
     
    1. Children in today's world need to be familiar with computers, don't they?
    As far as the use of computers is concerned, you can hardly prevent this. As I once heard Joseph Weizenbaum say, kids absorb this stuff through their pores. They no more need special, computer-literacy education in the primary grades than they need toaster-literacy or automobile-literacy courses. You can't keep them from learning it. In fact, it's mostly the teachers who are racing around madly trying to figure out what to do with all these machines we're bequeathing them; as often as not, it's the kids who save the day.

    There are, of course, class differences in this regard; some kids have readier access to computers than others. But the point is that this access is not necessary for primary school children in the first place. Certainly the software they learn today will not be the software they need on the job.

    Return to table of contents

    1. What should we teach high-school students about computers?
    The critical thing is not to make sure they know how to surf the Net, but rather to help them understand the nature of the technology: where does it come from historically, what aspects of the human being does it express, what are the basic principles of its operation, what are the strengths and limitations of the algorithmic (recipe-like) thinking that constitutes all programming, how does the computer begin to alter social relationships....Actually, computers themselves need play only a limited role in these investigations; students can learn a great deal simply by working with algorithms and even acting out the internal operations of computer.

    These, of course, are not the subjects that policy-makers are attending to in their mania to wire every classroom.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Isn't the Internet irreplaceable as a source of information?
    It may become so if we insist on using it to replace all other sources of information.

    But the decisive point is this: the problems of education have never in recent history resulted from an information bottleneck. We were an information society long before the computer arrived; our problem has been coping with a surfeit of information-- selecting from it, evaluating it, making sense of it. The only way to make sense of information is to rise above it in the experience of meaning--a journey that requires imagination more than anything else.

    See also question 28.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Why not use the Internet to bring world-class science into the schoolhouse?
    A favorite gambit here is to invite students to program some laboratory's robot across the Net. One research organization, for example, lets students drive a robot called "Nero" around the Chamber of Horrors in Madame Tussauds, London.

    But such arrangements do not make scientists into teachers. If one scientist can efficiently spread himself around a lot of classrooms, it is precisely because he doesn't really have to be there. It is no accident that robotics should be a common focus, because the real effect of these projects is to direct children increasingly toward instrument-mediated information. A thousand children cannot all interact with the scientist personally; what they can do is interact with software.

    So the students come away with a few scattered, undigested facts about the operation of remote-controlled vehicles, and no knowledge at all about the more approachable engineering principles--including the principles of computing--upon which modern society is based.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Can't we use the Internet to help students become world citizens?
    The interface between a student and her Net pal is undeniably thin, one-dimensional, remote. As valuable as it may nevertheless be, it is not the missing key for teaching global citizenship. It scarcely counts beside the much more fundamental sources of social understanding. The girl, of course, will learn whatever she does of friendship from peers who sweat, bleed, taunt, curse, tantalize, steal, console, and so on.

    It I need to find out whether she will become a good world citizen, don't show me a file of her email correspondence. Just let me observe her behavior on the playground for a few minutes- -assuming she spends her class breaks on the playground, and not at her terminal playing video games.

    A high-school computer instructor wrote to me that "students who think it is cool to have a pen pal in Malaysia won't talk to the black students who locker next to them....I have run a telecom project for students in TAG classes for the last two years and I have yet to see any of the TAG students, who spent weeks `talking' with students in Kuala Lumpur, say so much as a word to the Southeast Asian students in the ESL program."

    Return to table of contents

    1. Do CD-ROMs and nature videos instill a love of nature in children?
    There is a modest but growing body of research about the influences that make people choose careers as environmentalists, naturalists, ecologists, and so on--careers suggesting a concern for the natural world. Louise Chawla of Kentucky State University, having recently reviewed this literature, reports a remarkable consistency regarding two of the dominant influences: wild places directly experienced (usually at a young age), and adult mentors.

    The crucial requirement for the child to develop a love for nature is not that he be exposed to novel, high-impact screen images, but rather that he actively discover within himself a connection to the phenomena he is observing. High-impact images create a hunger for "more and better," but, if anything, put the child at an even greater psychological distance from the natural world than before.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Why not use the Internet to help children learn foreign languages?
    It is perfectly reasonable for the more advanced language student to look for opportunities to correspond with language natives. It is worth noting, however, that this opportunity has long been available--without massive capital outlay--courtesy of the postal system. Students who send and receive one email message per day can just as easily send and receive one letter per day. That email has suddenly given new life to the idea is certainly owing to the computer's glamor. But if glamor is the substance of the new educational paradigm, then we're in trouble.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Must we get school children onto the Net in order to prepare them for 21st century jobs?
    This is to forget the primary purpose of education: to help us achieve our fullest humanity. This achievement should, in the end, determine what sorts of jobs are created, rather than the existing jobs determining what sort of human beings we try to raise. Responsibility requires us, before we introduce the computer into the classroom, to have a clear picture of the child and a clear picture of what it means to educate the child, along with an understanding of how the computer relates to these pictures. The existence of such clarity is not evident today.

    Educators are now subjected to an intense fear of being left behind, but are offered no coherent notion of what is ahead and why. Don't forget the earlier mania for computer-aided instruction, which died away with scarcely a trace. So, too, did the fad for computer literacy through programming in BASIC. Now it's the Internet. Have we this time learned something profound and new about the true nature of education?

    Return to table of contents

    Media
    -----

    1. Will the computer deliver us from the television wasteland?
    Home page consultants are telling us how we need "production values" in our home pages: action, surprises, eye-catching layout. The hypertext link, or button, is close cousin to the remote control button. Our videogame heritage has taught us well how to approach every hypertext link with quick reflexes and a hunger for whatever jolt or transient treasure lies behind it.

    While watching TV, we at least had to get up now and then and confront others, if only at the supermarket checkout stand. Increasingly, the computer enables us to reduce even this activity to a kind of passivity. The question of responsibility here: in what ways, and with what parts of myself, do I choose to engage the world and the rest of society?

    Return to table of contents

    1. Doesn't the computer's interactivity make it superior to television?
    It certainly allows us to do some things we couldn't do with television. But you have to compare the right things. The computer's interactivity should not be compared to television (it will not, for example, redeem the soap opera or sitcom), but rather to those various, more active engagements we once could not avoid, but now can replace with a more passive activity while sitting in front of a screen. There's where the substitution occurs. And it's hard to avoid the conclusion that the local town hall meeting, for example, when shifted to the computer from the old, face-to-face format, will be nudged in the same direction that television had already nudged politics.

    Return to table of contents

     
    INFORMATION
     
    1. Is more information the key to our problems?
    Neil Postman has been reminding us repeatedly that "if a nuclear holocaust should occur some place in the world, it will not happen because of insufficient information; if children are starving in Somalia, it's not because of insufficient information; if crime terrorizes our cities, marriages are breaking up, mental disorders are increasing, and children are being abused, none of this happens because of a lack of information."

    Nobody seems to be listening. Yet Postman is right, insofar as information is thought of as something given, something we can "access," store, and process -- so far, that is, as we view it in the manner of a program. Meaning, by contrast, cannot be accessed. It can only be entered into -- and then only through the exercise of those neglected faculties standing at the opposite pole from our activities as information processors.

    See also question 20.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Will computers give us mastery over information?
    We are forever being told that the next advances in technology-- more elaborate filters, information rating schemes, personalized software agents ("knowbots") that roam the Net gleaning information precisely targeted to our interests--will finally enable us to ride the crest of the information flood rather than drown in it.

    What we forget is that the arms race between the powers of information proliferation and the powers of information management is an endlessly escalating one. The logical finesse with which we manage information is the same logical finesse that generates yet more information and outflanks the tools of management. Software agents are quite as capable of mindlessly flinging off information as of mindlessly collecting it.

    Surely there is only one escape from the mindlessness: to realize that the essential contest is not between information management and information inflation, but between the obsession with information (well managed or otherwise) and the habit of quiet reflection. It is not an overload of information so much as a deficit of meaning we suffer from, not a lack of proper filters so much as the loss of mental focus--an inadequate power of sustained attention to what is important.

    Return to table of contents

     
    COMMUNITY, BUSINESS, AND ECONOMICS
     
    1. Are computer networks strengthening community?
    Every means of communication can be used for deepening community. Some of the American POWs in Vietnam apparently formed deep connections on the basis of not much more than occasional tapping on walls.

    But while everything is possible, not everything is equally easy. Restrict the internal communications of a corporation to wall- tapping, and competitive failure will be much more certain than the deepening of community. In general, the narrower the communication channel, the harder we have to work to communicate meaningfully.

    The current upshot of the matter is this: in a society that has long been fleeing what vestiges of community remain to it, a medium that makes our exchange even more indirect and automated does not show much promise of improving things overall. If you want to avoid coming to terms with someone, will you typically find it easier to meet him face-to-face, to call him on the phone, or send him an email message?

    Return to table of contents

    1. Who are the corporate bad guys?
    If, as many think, the large, powerful corporation is the big, bad wolf, you and I are the ones who huff and puff and inflate this wolf to monstrous proportions. I'm not aware that the hundreds of thousands of employees in the wolfish corporations are very much different in their work ethic, moral values, and general purposes from those of us in most other corporate settings. We willingly merge ourselves into one seamless operation, from board member to janitor. The Apple Computers and Microsofts and Time Warners of our society continually progress, or try to progress, from challenging Big Brother to *being* Big Brother -- all as a result of a "natural" evolution to which most of us yield ourselves in our own corporate and consumer contexts every day.

    Where, then, does the bad of the big bad wolf arise? Only from that same pattern of "innocent," half-awake behavior that is to be found in nearly every corporation. A System can only sustain itself in the presence of a drowsy people willing to be Systematized.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Will computers support centralized authority or undermine it?
    Edward Tenner, in Why things Bite Back, put it this way:
    Where some find inventiveness percolating up and correspondingly rewarded, others find discipline and punishment raining down and privacy trampled underfoot. If networks appear to open channels previously barred--and it's not clear how having to put ink on paper ever prevented sending a message to top management--they also make it possible to read files surreptitiously, monitor activities, and even trace message traffic to discover clusters of malcontents.
    Maybe we need to be looking for a third possibility. See next question.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Can there be tyrannical, non-centralized authority?
    The digital logic upon which networked technology is erected wants to be universal, ever more rigorous, more tightly woven. Logic, that is, wants to be articulated with logic, until there is perfect, overall consistency. Such logical consistency--with all its coercive possibilities with respect to the evolution of human social structures--is quite compatible with a kind of fragmentation and centrifugal movement. This suggests that there are anti-human potentials of technology we haven't yet learned to recognize--potentials that are neither centralizing nor decentralizing in the traditional sense--or are both at the same time.

    The beehive may give us a relevant picture. Its intricate (and subhuman) unity seems to arise from nowhere. "Even the queen bee cannot be regarded as the visible guardian and guarantor of the totality, for if she dies, the hive, instead of disintegrating, creates a new queen" (Herman Poppelbaum). There is no totalitarian center of the hive, and yet the logic of the whole remains coherent and uncompromising. It is an external logic in the sense that it is not wakeful, not self-aware, not consciously assenting; it moves the individual as if from without.

    Return to table of contents

    Censorship
    ----------

    1. Why is there pressure for censorship on the Net?
    The paradox, of course, is that there are concerns about censorship in a medium that (according to one of the hallowed doctrines of the Net) "treats censorship like a malfunction, and routs around it." (This paradox is paralleled by a second one: the existence of acute threats to privacy within a medium of relative anonymity.)

    The apparently incompatible facts belong together. To adapt various family, educational, and communal functions to a faceless, unstable, unrooted, and unruly medium such as the Net is to guarantee rising demands for censorship, lest the existing institutions simply disappear into the anarchic cauldron of cyberspace. There is an indisputable validity to these demands, as also to the insistence upon their danger. And there is the expected technological arms race between would-be censors and would-be defenders of unbridled speech--an arms race that, unavoidable as it may be, tends more and more to destroy the kind of contexts where we can learn to combine freedom with respect for the other.

    Return to table of contents

    1. As far as children are concerned, isn't it easy enough to assign responsibility for their online protection to their parents?
    Telling parents that they should be responsible for their children's Net exposure says nothing at all about the urgent issues. After all, parents should also be responsible for their children's exposure to mortar shells in a war zone; but most of us would take that to mean: get the children out of this zone if at all possible, and if not, at least do what you can to work toward an end of the war. What, then, does taking responsibility for the Net mean? That is the question, and it requires much more of a radical mindset than is implied by simplistic, "put parents in control" rhetoric.

    It is intolerable to have congressional representatives (of all people!) setting cultural standards of decency. But it is also intolerable to commit ourselves, our society, our children to a medium in which it is virtually impossible for cultural standards -- or anything recognizable as culture itself -- to arise at all. The Net is, in its fundamental manifestations to date, as corrosive of culture as anything yet conceived by man.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Why do you say the Net is corrosive of culture?
    One critical place where we require freedom of expression is in the schooling of our children. Parents should be able to place their children in a school that reflects their deepest convictions about what is true and good and beautiful, about the developmental needs of their children, and about the sort of cultural heritage their children ought to enjoy.

    Imagine a school system where every parent supposedly had this right to choose a school, but where all schools were jammed into one vast, open, chaotic building, with teachers and students indiscriminately scattered around. If parents had little choice but to submit their children to such a system, then, far from being free and uncensored, it would actually force an ugly and artificial homogenization, removing all the freedom and diversity that should belong to education.

    The fact is that freedoms are meaningless apart from cultural traditions, reasonably stable institutions, boundaries that allow the flowering of different value systems, places that overflow with the intensity of enfleshed human presence -- in general, apart from a real cultural topography that offers some predictability and constancy, as well as healthy evolution. But all these requirements are exactly what the Net tends to destroy.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Do we have an absolute right of free speech?
    All meaningful human activity emerges within a matrix of needs and constraints that none of us is fully able to control. It is as true to say that these give us something to be free about--give us challenges against which to exercise our freedom--as it is to say that they restrict our freedom. Remove that matrix and you may think yourself free, but you are really just adrift.

    Much good will continue to arise as governments increasingly respect human rights. But remember that something else has been going on as well: those various contexts in which a complementary weave of rights and responsibilities gave concrete form to our lives--contexts, for example, provided by family and local community--have long been eroding. As a result, we are being thrown back upon ourselves as isolated, self-determining, rights-bearing individuals, disconnected from any social matrix that would enable us to connect meaningfully and responsibly to our neighbors. We are bound to face many insoluble conflicts as unrooted individuals and groups bump into each other. There will be no pure solution to these conflicts from the side of free speech or the side of censorship.

    What is discouraging is to hear the gurus of cyberspace beating the drums for freedom and fulminating against the evils of repressed lawmakers, while scarcely whispering a word about any new wellsprings of responsibility we might draw upon to give form and substance to our inviolate freedoms. If government is of limited help in this sphere (it is), and if the ever more weakened family and community no longer mediate a powerful sense of responsibility to us, and if the workplace is intent upon computing the bottom line as an end in itself, what sources can we draw upon? The question does not seem to arise, and many are willing to go the obvious next step, enshrining the anarchic individual adrift in cyberspace as the new ideal.

    Return to table of contents

    Privacy and Security
    --------------------

    1. Can the battle for privacy be won in cyberspace?
    The battle for privacy, waged upon fields of data, will be lost. The reason it will be lost is that, precisely insofar as our social functioning becomes a matter of interacting data, to that degree there is nothing to which a decent concept of privacy can attach. There exists, on the fields of data, neither a self whose dignity and privacy is worth defending, nor a self that a global data processing system is capable of defending. If privacy does not apply, in the first instance, to the socially embedded individual--if it does not first flourish as an ideal in intimate, personal spaces--it cannot flourish in cyberspace.

    Privacy is inseparable from a certain willingness to lower one's eyes and to hold sacred what one knows about the other person. When it has become a mere drive toward anonymity, it necessarily vanishes as a meaningful standard for our life together, signaling instead our disconnection.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Where is the battle for security being fought?
    Most of us are daily in positions where someone could easily walk up to us, pull a gun or knife, and kill us. In most social environments, we don't worry about that, and the crime rarely occurs. We are "exposed," so to speak, but the prevailing mores of society are such that it turns out not to be a risky exposure.

    On the other hand, when the risk of the crime becomes too great, we have little choice but to minimize our exposure. As a society we may then start conceiving the challenge as a wholly technical one--how to wall ourselves off from each other, devise new alarm systems, beef up police forces, and so on. Actions of this sort may become necessary, but we should realize that they are signs of a losing battle and may actually worsen the underlying causes of the problems. Again (see question 38), the decisive battle is not the technical one.

    Healthy public and private spheres exist only by virtue of each other, in a complex and delicate balance.

    Return to table of contents

    1. So how can we achieve a desirable privacy and security?
    We must strengthen our non-data interactions and institutions so that their additional muscularity and resilience can anchor the centrifugal and dissipative forces of our online, more or less data-like projections of ourselves. Where else can we learn what needs respecting about each other, if not from a knowledge of the other person in particular and of the requirements of a healthily functioning community in general?

    It is possible--although it will be a tremendous stretch--for us to extend our gestures of human respect to the abstract, placeless, and timeless data representations of other people. But it isn't conceivable that we will succeed in this greater challenge while failing the lesser and more familiar one. We cannot--as programmers, application users, corporate employees, consumers--enlarge our respect for persons to embrace data when we are forgetting what respect for persons means in the first place.

    Return to table of contents

    Computer Applications and Hardware
    ----------------------------------

    1. When will technical progress carry us beyond computer performance and memory limitations?
    To expect the impressive, technical gains in speed and memory capacity to remove performance pains is to confuse the human and technical levels of the problem. (See question 7.) After all, our problem is not experienced directly as a lack of computational power; it is felt, rather, as inconvenient delay, lost personal time, the inaccessibility of "cutting-edge" software, and the difficulty of working with awkwardly performing tools. No technical advances are ever likely to alter the fundamental shape of these problems, because the advances and our frustrations lie on separate planes.

    In fact, as long as we are driven to desire the latest technology for its own sake (which is very much part of the human side of the problem), memory improvements and all the technical innovations they stimulate can only worsen our situation: the pace of change accelerates, new inventions proliferate, and every cutting-edge toy we play with is now twelve months instead of twenty-four months away from the inadequacies of its obsolescence. Clearly this shrinking time interval tells us more about our prospects for satisfaction than does the increasing density of integrated circuits.

    Return to table of contents

     
    RESPONSES TO THE CHALLENGE OF TECHNOLOGY
     
    1. Isn't timidity in the face of today's technological revolution just a matter of humans feeling threatened by rapid change? And won't the successful survivors be those who vigorously adapt?
    Certainly we must adapt. The question is whether we will exercise all the responsibility we possibly can for the shape of the changes we're adapting to. Apart from such a resolve, the advice to adapt is reprehensible and anti-human. The good citizens of Nazi Germany learned to adapt all too well.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Should we smash the intelligent machines around us?
    Neither the uncritical, pro-technology stance nor the violently anti-technology stance is a matter of wakefulness. Mastering the machines in our lives is as different from smashing them as it is from yielding passively to them.

    Return to table of contents

    1. Which, finally, is more justified: optimism or pessimism?
    Look for the signs. The surest indication that we are allowing technology to lead us toward disaster is the conviction that it is leading us toward paradise.

    To believe, for example, that the automobile's (or the computer network's) ability to shrink distances has anything whatever to do with the varying sorts of inner distance and connection that community weaves between people is to have lost sight of community. Any technology in the hands of a people that has lost sight of community will prove an instrument for the destruction of community, simply because the destruction hinges in the first place on the lost sight, not on the technology.

    In other words: technological pessimism is justified precisely to the degree we feel technological optimism.

    Return to table of contents

  • Goto NETFUTURE main page
  • post2rXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate im2r ng)+M ntry(:g?3f{dP#Hy\ft url >http://www.fcc.gov/Bureaus/OPP/working_papers/oppwp29pdf.htmlmime text/htmlhntt"32fa09-b80-335ba970"hvrsdata OPP Working Paper Series 29 Digital Tornado: The Internet and Telecommunications Policy
    Federal Communications Commission
    navigation bar with links to FCC Homepage, Search, Commissioners, Bureaus/Offices, and Finding Information


    OPP Working Paper Series 29
    Digital Tornado: The Internet and Telecommunications Policy

    picture of first page of paper The Working Paper is available here in Adobe Acrobat format so that when you look at it on your screen or print it out on your printer it will look identical to the FCC's original version regardless of the computer platform, operating system, browser, or fonts that you may be using.

    To view the Order you must have Acrobat Reader software installed on your computer and configured as a "helper" or "plug-in" application in your browser. If not, you need to download, install, and configure the free Adobe Acrobat Reader Software . If you already have the Reader installed and configured, select one of the following options:

    [ News Release | WordPerfect Version | Text Version ]

    last updated 4/1/97
    postP#HXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate :gP#H WȯY+ ntry(SVݪ^wg?z*sI~mtmB%Yurl http://www.fcc.gov/mime text/htmlhntt"253645-414c-37e01a9e"hvrsdata Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Home Page
    text-only
    FCC logo
    part of FCC building
    scrolling headlines - major initiatives
    FCC Portals 2 BuildingFCC Portals 2 Buildingabout the FCC
    Commissioners
    major initiatives
    bureaus and offices
    releases and updates
    | Site Map | Daily Digest | Search | Agenda | Forms | Fees | E-Filing | Consumer Info |

    FCC Chairman
    William E. Kennard

    Video | Transcript

    “We are standing at the threshold of a new century, a century that promises to be as revolutionary in the technology that affects our daily lives and the future of our country as the inventions that so profoundly shaped the past 100 years.

    As we enter this digital future, Continued . . .


    FCC Commissioners:
      Susan Ness
      Harold W. Furchtgott-Roth
      Michael K. Powell
      Gloria Tristani


    About the FCCLearn
    More About
    the FCC

    A more detailed look at the FCC. Information includes mission, organization, workforce, job opportunities, phone book, and more.



    For Suggestions and Comments regarding the FCC Website, contact Sheryl Segal.

    - H e a d l i n e s -

  • Chairman Kennard's Remarks before the National Association of Minorities in Cable, in New York. 9/14/99

  • FCC Promotes Local Telecommunications Competition: Adopts Rules on Unbundling of Network Elements. 9/15/99

  • Commission Increases Competition for Overseas Long-Distance Service: Allows Direct Access to Users of INTELSAT Satellite Services From the United States. 9/15/99

  • FCC Authorizes Lockheed Martin to Purchase Up to 49 Percent of COMSAT. 9/15/99

  • FCC Largely Retains Spectrum Cap, Ensuring That Consumers Continue to See Benefits of Competition; Relaxes Spectrum Cap in Rural Areas. 9/15/99

  • FCC Acts to Promote Competition and Public Safety in Enhanced Wireless 911 Services. 9/15/99

  • Carriers are Reminded of Their Obligation to Provide Access to Their Telecommunications Services via Telecommunications Relay Service. 9/15/99

  • Commission Releases NPRM that Seeks to Promote Universal Service in Tribal Lands and Other Insular Areas. 8/5/99, 9/14/99

  • Comments Requested in Connection with Court Remand of August 1998 Advanced Services Order. 9/10/99

  • Statements from Chairman Kennard and Commissioner Tristani on the New Kermit The Frog V-Chip Public Service Announcement. 9/10/99

  • Ameritech and SBC Ex Parte Presentation Concerning their Proposed Merger Conditions. [ Text | Word97 ], Attachment 1 [ Text | Word97 ], Attachment 2 [ Text | Word97 ] 9/9/99


    More...


  • Broadband Internet AccessBroadband
    Internet
    Access

    The FCC is vigilantly monitoring the rollout of broadband access and encouraging competition in this market.

    V-ChipV-Chip
    The FCC requires new TVs to have a "v-chip" which allows parents to block programming they judge inappropriate for their children from coming into their home.

    A New FCC for the 21st CenturyA New FCC
    for the
    21st Century

    The FCC's five-year Strategic Plan for deregulating.

    Disabilities Issues Task ForceDisabilities Issues
    Task Force

    The FCC has an obligation to ensure that telecommunications are accessible and usable to the 54 million Americans with disabilities.

    FCC Year 2000 Home PageFCC Year 2000 Home Page
    The purpose of the FCC Year 2000 website is to provide an information resource addressing the readiness of communications for the Year 2000 date conversion.

    FCC FeesFCC Fees
    Section 9 of the Communications Act authorizes the Commission to collect annual regulatory fees to recover the annual costs of its enforcement, policy and rulemaking, user information, and international activities. Fees are due September 13-22, 1999.

    More...



    Federal Communications Commission
    445 12th St. SW
    Washington DC 20554

    (202) 418-0190
    fccinfo@fcc.gov
    | More Contact Information

    Availability of documents on the FCC Internet site does not constitute official Commission action.
    Release of the printed full text of a Commission order constitutes official Commission action.

    Web Site Policies & Notices

    http://www.fcc.gov/

    9/15/99

    postXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate SV d+ B%ALntry( HomeNet Research Page  
    Home

    Research Reports

    Researchers

    Affiliates

     

    Publications and Press Releases from the HomeNet Project


    HomeNet Contact Information:

    Bozena Zdaniuk,
    Social and Decision Sciences
    5000 Forbes Avenue
    Pittsburgh, PA 15213
    412-268-7505 (voice) bzdaniuk@andrew.cmu.edu post4eXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate The Economist postOXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate 1FEO +ntry(bxiiC 2ʷ>xxfTurl .http://www.wired.com/wired/5.09/newrules.htmlmime text/htmlhvrsdata Feature

    W I R E D
    Archive | 5.09 - Sep 1997 | Feature

    About Us
     
    SUBSCRIBE
    New - Special Offer!
    Give Wired
    Renew
    Reprints
    Customer Service
    BROWSE ARCHIVE

    Current Issue
    Covers
    People
    Topics
    GET OUR NEWSLETTER
    FIND A BOOK

    Powered by barnesandnoble.com

    WIRED INDEX FUND
    Introduction
    Live Quotes
    Download Prospectus
    View the Portfolio
    ADVERTISE
    Contact Information
    General Ads
    Market Display Ads
    Market Line Ads
    Adlinks
    HOTWIRED
    Frontdoor
    Wired News
    Webmonkey
    RGB Gallery
    Animation Express
    Webmonkey Guides
    Suck.com
    HOTBOT
    Search
    Shopping

     
     
    Send us feedback


    Page 1 of 12
    previous | start | next
    Printing? Use this version


    New Rules for the New Economy
    By Kevin Kelly

    SEE ALSO
    Archive Category:
    Computers

    Global Economy

    Twelve dependable principles for thriving in a turbulent world


    The Digital Revolution gets all the headlines these days. But turning slowly beneath the fast-forward turbulence, steadily driving the gyrating cycles of cool technogadgets and gotta-haves, is a much more profound revolution - the Network Economy.

    This emerging new economy represents a tectonic upheaval in our commonwealth, a social shift that reorders our lives more than mere hardware or software ever can. It has its own distinct opportunities and its own new rules. Those who play by the new rules will prosper; those who ignore them will not.

    The advent of the new economy was first noticed as far back as 1969, when Peter Drucker perceived the arrival of knowledge workers. The new economy is often referred to as the Information Economy, because of information's superior role (rather than material resources or capital) in creating wealth.

    I prefer the term Network Economy, because information isn't enough to explain the discontinuities we see. We have been awash in a steadily increasing tide of information for the past century. Many successful knowledge businesses have been built on information capital, but only recently has a total reconfiguration of information itself shifted the whole economy.

    The grand irony of our times is that the era of computers is over. All the major consequences of stand-alone computers have already taken place. Computers have speeded up our lives a bit, and that's it.

    In contrast, all the most promising technologies making their debut now are chiefly due to communication between computers - that is, to connections rather than to computations. And since communication is the basis of culture, fiddling at this level is indeed momentous.

    And fiddle we do. The technology we first invented to crunch spreadsheets has been hijacked to connect our isolated selves instead. Information's critical rearrangement is the widespread, relentless act of connecting everything to everything else. We are now engaged in a grand scheme to augment, amplify, enhance, and extend the relationships and communications between all beings and all objects. That is why the Network Economy is a big deal.

    The new rules governing this global restructuring revolve around several axes. First, wealth in this new regime flows directly from innovation, not optimization; that is, wealth is not gained by perfecting the known, but by imperfectly seizing the unknown. Second, the ideal environment for cultivating the unknown is to nurture the supreme agility and nimbleness of networks. Third, the domestication of the unknown inevitably means abandoning the highly successful known - undoing the perfected. And last, in the thickening web of the Network Economy, the cycle of "find, nurture, destroy" happens faster and more intensely than ever before.

    The Network Economy is not the end of history. Given the rate of change, this economic arrangement may not endure more than a generation or two. Once networks have saturated every space in our lives, an entirely new set of rules will take hold. Take these principles, then, as rules of thumb for the interim.

    1 The Law of Connection

    Embrace dumb power

    The Network Economy is fed by the deep resonance of two stellar bangs: the collapsing microcosm of chips and the exploding telecosm of connections. These sudden shifts are tearing the old laws of wealth apart and preparing territory for the emerging economy.

    As the size of silicon chips shrinks to the microscopic, their costs shrink to the microscopic as well. They become cheap and tiny enough to slip into every - and the key word here is every - object we make. The notion that all doors in a building should contain a computer chip seemed ludicrous 10 years ago, but now there is hardly a hotel door without a blinking, beeping chip. Soon, if National Semiconductor gets its way, every FedEx package will be stamped with a disposable silicon flake that smartly tracks the contents. If an ephemeral package can have a chip, so can your chair, each book, a new coat, a basketball. Thin slices of plastic known as smart cards hold a throwaway chip smart enough to be your banker. Soon, all manufactured objects, from tennis shoes to hammers to lamp shades to cans of soup, will have embedded in them a tiny sliver of thought. And why not?


    Kevin Kelly is Wired's executive editor.

    Page 2 >>




    Copyright © 1993-99 The Condé Nast Publications Inc. All rights reserved.

    Copyright © 1994-99 Wired Digital, Inc. All rights reserved.

    post2XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate b2 2 + xfwntry(P 깪?7Gl!LB1\~σ#[url 5http://www.firstmonday.dk/issues/issue2_4/goldhaber/mime text/htmlhvrsdata The Attention Economy: The Natural Economy of the Net

    First Monday

    The Attention Economy: The Natural Economy of the Net

    If the Web and the Net can be viewed as spaces in which we will increasingly live our lives, the economic laws we will live under have to be natural to this new space. These laws turn out to be quite different from what the old economics teaches, or what rubrics such as "the information age" suggest. What counts most is what is most scarce now, namely attention. The attention economy brings with it its own kind of wealth, its own class divisions - stars vs. fans - and its own forms of property, all of which make it incompatible with the industrial-money-market based economy it bids fair to replace. Success will come to those who best accommodate to this new reality.

    Contents

    Greetings
    Change Happens
    A Feudal Hope
    The New Natural Economy
    A Driving Force
    Chatting, But Not Necessarily About Anything
    Illusory Attention
    The Effect of the Audience
    A Miniature Working Model
    A Material Economy Falls Victim to Its Own Success
    It's Not for Productivity
    A Point Worth Repeating, Though Not Too Often
    Organizations Diminish as Transparency Grows
    Material Things Reinterpreted
    Wealth and Property Take New Forms, Too
    Money and Attention
    Business as Performance
    Further Expectations
    Advice for the Transition
    A Closing Scenario
    The End
    Notes

    Explanatory note: This article began as a draft of a conference[ * ] presentation, and has been left pretty much in that form. Another version was actually presented.

    Greetings

    This is a conference on the "Economics of Digital Information." My guess is that most of the speakers, and most of the listeners interpret that title to mean that while "digital information" requires special consideration enough to justify a special conference, the basic meaning of the word "economics" can be taken for granted. What we are to be concerned with is how prices, costs, productivity, and so forth apply to digital information.

    My vantage point is quite different. What we mean by economics cannot be taken for granted if what we are talking about is the economics which applies, say, to the Internet, or more generally to cyberspace, or more generally still, to life in the foreseeable future. We are moving into a period wholly different from the past era of factory-based mass production of material items when talk of money, prices, returns on investment, laws of supply and demand, and so on all made excellent sense. We now have to think in wholly new economic terms, for we are entering an entirely new kind of economy. The old concepts will just not have value in that new context.

    Of course, there is nothing so new about the insight that the Internet is part of a revolutionary change in the way we do things and also in why we do them. Many names for the new era have been invoked: the information age, the Third Wave, the move towards cyberspace, all of which point, vaguely at least to the fact that new patterns of activity and of interrelationships among people are now emerging. The trouble with that insight is that it is so vague that you can easily agree with it without feeling the necessity of changing your economic thinking in the least. My effort over the past several years - it's embarrassing to admit how many - has been to overcome that vagueness, to come up with specifics about what this revolution actually implies. My conclusions are that we are headed into what I call the attention economy.

    Change Happens

    Before offering any details about the new economy itself I want to deal with a feeling you no doubt have. "Economics is economics; it really can't change." Even if you are not saying that in so many words, I feel fairly confident it is somewhere in your mind at this point. To try to convince you at least to have some doubts about that certainty, let me invoke two different analogies. (Since it is obviously beyond my capabilities to explain the full workings of an entire new economy in the brief time available here, getting you to take the thought of it seriously would not be a useless accomplishment.) The first analogy comes from science. Most scientists would agree that early in its existence, the planet Earth held no life. There were various kinds of minerals, volcanoes, sea water, chemicals in solution - lots going on, but all of it understandable in terms of the laws of physics, chemistry, geology. Then, fairly suddenly, some chemical molecules began to commingle in a new way, capable of growing and reproducing. Life had emerged, and, in its tremendous variety, grew and flourished according to completely new laws, the laws of molecular biology, of physiology, of ecology and so on.

    To try to understand life solely on the basis of the old laws of physics and chemistry, would be an enormous, crippling mistake; you couldn't talk about the most obvious things, like sex or aging or digestion or species or parasites, since those are all biological concepts that have no place in physics or chemistry. The parallel I want to draw is that the new kinds of connection that the Net and cyberspace make possible also demand a whole new way of thinking if you are to understand what is going on between people, the kinds of organized effort that are now possible, the motivations that most matter, and a host of other facets of life.

    This analogy is imperfect in one way though. I don't mean to imply that the new concepts of economics we need come on top of or in addition to the old concepts. Rather, economics is about the overall patterns of effort and motivation that shape our lives, and it is these patterns and motivations that are changing. That implies a wholly new set of economic laws that replace the ones we all have learned.

    A Feudal Hope

    My second analogy should make this point more clearly. It also involves looking back to an earlier time, but, instead of billions of years ago we now must think back a mere five centuries. The expansion into cyberspace now underway parallels the expansion of European civilization into North and South America that followed Columbus's discoveries, exactly 498 years before Tim Berners-Lee discovered, or rather invented, the Web. Europe back then in the 15th century was still ruled pretty much on feudal lines, and the feudal lords took it for granted that the new world would be a space for more of a feudal economy, with dukes and counts and barons and earls ruling over serfs throughout the newly discovered continents. They did in fact begin to set up that system, but it was not what turned out to flourish in the new space. Instead, the capitalist, market-based industrial economy, then just starting out, found the new soil much more congenial. Eventually it grew so strong in North America that, when it re-crossed the ocean, it finally completed its move to dominance in Western Europe and then elsewhere in the world [
    1 ].

    Contemporary economic ideas stem from that selfsame market-based industrialism, which was thoroughly different from the feudal, subsistence-farming-based economy that preceded it. We tend to think, as we are taught, that economic laws are timeless. That is plain wrong. Those laws hold true in particular periods and in a particular kind of space. The characteristic landscape of feudalism, dotted with small fields, walled villages, and castles, differs markedly from the industrial landscape of cities, smokestack factories and railroads, canals, or superhighways. The "landscape" of cyberspace exists only in our minds, perhaps, but even so it is where we are increasingly coming to live, and it looks nothing like either of those others. If cyberspace grows to encompass interactions between the billions of people now on the planet, those kinds of interaction will be utterly different from what prevailed for the last few centuries, or ever before [ 2 ].

    If you want to thrive in this new world, it behooves you not to mistake it for a place where the dukes and earls of today will naturally continue to prosper, but rather to learn to think in terms of the economy natural to it [ 3 ].

    The New Natural Economy

    So, at last, what is this new economy about? Well if the Net exemplifies it, then you might guess it has less to do with material things than with the kinds of entity that can flow through the Net. We are told over and over just what that is: information. Information, however, would be an impossible basis for an economy, for one simple reason: economies are governed by what is scarce, and information, especially on the Net, is not only abundant, but overflowing. We are drowning in the stuff, and yet more and more comes at us daily. That is why terms like "information glut" have become commonplace, after all. Furthermore, if you have any particular piece of information on the Net, you can share it easily with anyone else who might want it. It is not in any way scarce, and therefore it is not an information economy towards which we are moving. What would be the incentive in organizing our lives around spewing out more information if there is already far too much?

    Well, my title gives it away, of course. There is something else that moves through the Net, flowing in the opposite direction from information, namely attention. So seeking attention could be the very incentive we are looking for. Parenthetically, I have now rejected both parts of the conference title; no economics in the conventional sense, and not digital information either. You might conclude I am speaking at the wrong conference. I would rather say it has the wrong title. Except the title did serve its purpose. It did get your attention, and that was something, in fact a lot.

    Attention, at least the kind we care about, is an intrinsically scarce resource [ 4 ]. Consider yours, right now. You are reading this paper, or more likely, since it is intended to be delivered at a conference, listening to me speaking it. You have a certain stock of attention at your disposal, and right now, a large proportion of the stock available to you is going to me, or to my words. Note that if I am standing in front of you it is difficult to distinguish between paying attention to me and paying attention to my words or thoughts; you can hardly do one without doing the other. If you are just reading this, assuming it gets printed in a book, the fact that your attention is going to me and not just to what I write may be slightly less obvious. So it is convenient to think of being in the audience at this conference in order to consider what attention economics is all about.

    First of all, if this talk is not a total bust, at this moment I am getting attention from a considerable audience. There is a net flow of attention towards me. If this is a reasonably polite group, there may be no great competition for your attention at the moment, but nonetheless, if there were, you would have to choose, or someone else, say the chair, would. The assembled audience cannot really pay attention to very many people speaking at once, usually not to more than one, in fact. Which is another way to say that the scarcity of attention is real and limiting.

    Now this might not matter if attention were not desirable and valuable in itself, but it is. In fact, it is a very nice feeling to have respectful attention from everybody within earshot, no matter how many people that may include. We have a word to describe a very attentive audience, and that word is "enthralled." A thrall is basically a slave. If, for instance, I should take it in my head to mention panda bears, you who are paying attention are forced to think "panda bears," a thought you had no inkling would come up when you decided to listen to this talk. Now let me ask, how many of you, on hearing the word "panda" saw a glimpse of a panda in your imagination? Raise your hands, please. Thank you. ... A ha.

    What just happened? I had your attention and I was able to convert it into a physical action on some of your parts, raising your hands. It comes with the territory. That is part of the power that goes with having attention, a point I will have reason to return to. Right now, it should be evident that having your attention means that I have the power to bend your minds and your bodies to my will, within limits that in turn have to do with how good I am at enthralling you. This can be a remarkable power. When you have superb control over your own body, so that you can perform great athletic feats, it feels great; likewise, it feels good when your mind feels focused and powerful; how much more wonderful then to be able to have the minds and bodies of others at your disposal! On the rather rare occasions when I have felt I was holding an audience "in the palm of my hand, hanging on my every word," I have very much enjoyed the feeling, and of course others who have felt the same have reported their feelings in the same terms. The elation is independent of what you happen to be talking about, even if it is to decry something you think is horrible.

    A Driving Force

    This is not a particularly huge audience, but it is possible to enthrall any number of people if you can reach them and if you are good enough at it. So having attention is very, very desirable, in some ways infinitely so, since the larger the audience, the better. And, yet, attention is also difficult to achieve owing to its intrinsic scarcity. That combination makes it the potential driving force of a very intense economy.

    Of course, not everybody necessarily wants a great deal of attention, just as in a money economy not everybody wants a great deal of money or many of the material goods that money can buy. But, just as in a money economy practically everyone must have some money to survive, so attention in some quantities is pretty much a prerequisite for survival, and attention is actually far more basic. This has always been the case for tiny babies. About the only thing they can get for themselves, or can give, is attention, which they begin to do within a half hour of birth, by smiling at those who smile at them. Without attention an infant could never satisfy its material needs, for food, warmth, fresh diapers, being burped, and so on. At a slightly later stage infants and toddlers need attention if they are to develop any sense of themselves as persons, and neither of those needs ever completely goes away. So even if you do not especially make a point of reaching for attention, even if you are very shy and reclusive, you still probably cannot do without some minimum, which however reluctantly, you may have to fight for. And no matter how humble you now may be, at some time in your own childhood you certainly sought attention, or you wouldn't be here.

    As we move towards an attention economy in a fuller sense, the ethos of the old economy which makes it often bad taste or a poor strategy to consciously seek attention seems to be giving way to an attitude that makes having a lot of attention rather admirable and seeking it not at all to be frowned upon. Think of the sorts of things people are now willing to admit about themselves just to get on the likes of Oprah or the Sally Jesse Raphael show. Even the President of the United States is willing to discuss his underwear on nationwide television.

    Chatting, But Not Necessarily About Anything

    But I am running a bit ahead of myself. Before saying more about the workings of the attention economy and its ramifications, I have to offer you a bit more of an idea about how to view different situations in terms of the exchange of attention. Earlier I suggested that when information flows one way through the Net, attention has to be flowing the other. Now I want to say that it would be even better to think in terms of attention of some kind flowing both ways.

    Consider an ordinary conversation. You could describe it as the exchange of information, but except in a highly technical sense that is rarely a very accurate description of what takes place. A conversation is primarily an exchange of attention. When you say "how are you?" for instance, you don't really want to know, as a rule, but if whomever you're talking with chooses to say how he or she is, it is more to get attention from you than to convey information. Even if this person genuinely thought you did want to know about her/his health, in answering, s/he would be attempting to pay attention to you. And even if you, in turn genuinely did want to know, the usual reason would be to pay attention to her/him.

    Information, in the sense of something not previously known to one of the parties or another is secondary, if present at all. If I want your attention for any reason, I might begin by asking you for information, such as who you are and what you do, not necessarily because that is of great interest to me, but because it is a good way to get your attention. Children ask countless questions with this motive often patently obvious, and adults are not necessarily any different. Even if I am desperately searching for some fact that you happen to know, to get it from you I first have to get your attention. So what really matters in every conversation is the exchange of attention -- an exchange that normally must be kept more or less equal if one party or the other isn't likely to lose interest.

    Illusory Attention

    Now, let us come back to the example of this conference, in fact the very interchange going on between me and you at this moment. If you are still paying attention, it is at least in part because what I am saying interests you; that is, to some extent I am addressing some need or desire that you now have. Thus it appears, in a certain sense that I am paying each of you attention individually, even though I can't really be doing that. Of course, in this setting it helps that I have some idea of why you are here, but I obviously am not in a position to focus on your individual needs. If just the two of us were having a conversation, rather than my standing up here and reading this paper to this whole audience, you would be quite rightly incensed if instead of pausing to answer your questions or seeing whether you were still interested I just talked on and on in this fashion. As another sign of the asymmetry between us, if I leave the room after this talk, I would be extremely unlikely to be able to recognize a particular one of you three months from now, though you might well be able to recognize me.

    What I am trying to get at here is that while you would normally want a conversation to involve a more or less equal exchange of attention, in the special circumstances that you are listening to a speaker, your feelings about what is a fair exchange are altered. What I would suggest is going on is less that I am providing you with information that you deem in advance will be of value, than that I am offering you individually the illusion of my full attention. I don't claim to be very good at this, but what I have done to some extent is to set up some expectations in you about what I will get to by the time the talk is finished, and any sense of progress towards that goal then feels as if I am filling your need, even though it is a need I have subtly created. (Any speaker must somehow do this, of course, to hold attention.)

    If rhetoric is the art of persuasive speech, then anyone who speaks or writes or seeks attention in any way has to become something of a success in the special rhetoric of persuading listeners, readers, and so on, that he or she is meeting their individual needs, when in fact some of these needs have been artfully set up in advance [ 5 ]. You want to know what I am driving at, for instance, because I have already provided clues galore that I am driving at something that should matter to you.

    My success, if any, in meeting these expectations I have myself set up in you will appear to be attention - call it illusory attention - that flows from me to you. That helps create an apparent equality of attention, and it can in fact go beyond that to create a feeling of obligation on your part or the part of other readers or listeners. The audience members can each feel they have not paid as much attention to a speaker as the speaker has paid personally to them, even though, in a very real sense the reverse is closer to the truth. The speaker may still not know them from Adam though they have the speaker's visage, voice, and thoughts permanently etched in memory.

    The Effect of the Audience

    Much more is going on here. One thing is the question of why you started listening in the first place. Well one reason is that I was introduced by the chair, who had your attention already, she was paying attention to the committee that set up this conference, in particular to Brian Kahin. He in turn paid attention to Esther Dyson, who gets paid a lot of attention. And indeed you possibly came here because you saw Esther's name on the organizing committee, and you already had gotten used to paying her attention. A key truth is that if you have the attention of an audience, you can then pass that on to someone else. For instance, if I happened to spot a friend of mine in the audience, or just chose someone at random, I could turn over all of your attention to that person.

    Now, the fact that attention can be passed on from someone who has it to someone else, and on and on, is of course a vital feature if there is to be anything resembling an economy. We will return to this general point. But right now, I want to combine the idea that I could pass the whole audience's attention on to you with the thought I introduced before that you can feel in a certain sense that I am paying attention to you specifically - what I referred to as illusory attention. Since I observably do have at least a good fraction of the whole audience's attention, if I were to pay attention specifically to you in reality, by singling you out, I would of course be paying not only my own attention but that of everyone else here, and yet, it would seem to be arriving at you through me.

    A Miniature Working Model

    And now, just a few more quick points about this conference. First, the whole conference works pretty much as an attention economy. While you are here, your main concern is how you pay attention and where you pay it, perhaps whether you get enough in return to have a chance at being one of the conference stars, perhaps only through the brilliance of the questions you ask. Even between sessions, the exchange of attention is what mostly tends to occupy people at a conference. Of course, there are material considerations, such as having enough to eat, a comfortable chair, etc. But they tend to be secondary issues, taken for granted, and not occupying much attention. We are living a temporary attention economy in miniature right at this moment.

    It bears repeating: We are living a temporary attention economy in miniature right at this moment. quote It should be evident by now that everyone has always lived with some degree of an attention economy, but through most of human history it hasn't been primary. Material needs and the production of material goods or the provision of purely material and basically impersonal services such as railways held sway. Even fifty years ago, the percentage of the American population that could take basic material needs for granted and didn't work directly in factories or on farms was much smaller than it is today.

    If you look at how you live your life when you are not attending this conference, you will probably see that quite a bit of what you personally do is better characterized as involving attention transactions than monetary transactions. You most likely make many more decisions every day about where and towards whom your attention should now go than about where your or anyone else's money should go. It is an issue every time you get a phone call, receive a memo, see someone you know waving at you, decide whether to go to a movie, or surf the Web, to list just a few examples. You are probably quite concerned too with getting attention in one way or another, or perhaps helping someone else get it. In this you are typical of a growing proportion of our society, and indeed of almost every sizable society on this globe now.

    A Material Economy Falls Victim to Its Own Success

    The simple fact, which I have no time to discuss at any length, is that compared with our capacity to produce material things, our net capacity to consume those things can no longer keep pace. Thus fewer and fewer of us, on a percentage basis are involved in producing standard items than ever before, and this is true despite the fact that per capita consumption of material goods keep rising. It just cannot rise fast enough to keep pace with possible production. There just is not enough work of the older kinds to keep us as busy as we once were. So, for example, actual manufacturing employment as a fraction of the total population continues its slow decline. Even in so-called developing nations, the Green Revolution in agriculture has led to the same sort of decline in the number employed producing material things, including food crops.

    Yet strangely, we are all busier than ever. In fact, in the light of what I have been saying so far, that is not so odd. It is precisely because material needs at the creature comfort level are fairly well satisfied for all those in a position to demand them that the need for attention, or what is closely related to attention, meaning or meaningfulness of life, takes on increasing importance. In other words, the energies set free by the successes of what I refer to as the money-industrial economy go more and more in the direction of obtaining attention. And that leads to growing competition for what is increasingly scarce, which is of course attention. It sets up an unending scramble, a scramble that also increases the demands on each of us to pay what scarce attention we can.

    And because we all need some attention, as competition for it rises, the effort begins to take on still more importance. When real attention of the right sort is unavailable, one has to make do to make do with the illusory kind, which comes through an increasing variety of media: paperback books, sound recordings, movies, radio, magazines, TV, video, and most recently computer software, CD-ROMs and the Web.

    It's Not for Productivity

    But the longing to get real attention and lots of it is only intensified by that experience. If the average kid today at age twenty has seen over 30,000 hours of TV, and, if, as is often suggested, TV offers young viewers role models for acceptable behavior, then the one thing everyone visible on the tube has in common to model is going after attention and getting it. This is also what is universally modeled by rock stars, successful athletes, politicians, and to a lesser degree even by school teachers and college professors.

    So it is no coincidence that some of the most popular uses of computers, fax machines, networks, phone systems, etc., have more to do with getting attention than with directly aiding what they are supposedly about, increasing productivity of an organization or society as a whole [ 6 ]. quote For an important truth is getting attention is of primary value to individuals rather than organizations, and attention also flows from individuals. This conference is sponsored by several organizations, most notably Harvard University, and quite possibly additional organizations have sent more than one attendee apiece. However, within the confines of the conference, attention flows primarily irrespective of organizational affiliation.

    If you are after attention, you use whatever organization you are part of as a stage upon which to perform for as wide an audience as you can manage. The Web and the Internet fit well in this model. The physical walls and barriers that might once have defined a university, a government bureau or an industrial corporation, making outside and inside sharply distinct, are pretty much no barriers at all on the Web or the Internet, or even on a phone system equipped not with a central switchboard allowing an operator to direct every incoming call but, as most are today, with direct inward dialing. You often don't even know what organization goes with the number you are dialing, the e-mail message you are responding to or the particular Web site you have been linked to.

    In a full attention economy practically all organizations will be basically temporary, either communities in which attention is shared around pretty equally, or, more often, entourages of fans who form around one or a few stars to help them achieve the performances they are attempting. Think of the groups that come together to make a movie or to create a new piece of software, etc. More often than not, a few stars dominate the process; in the case of a movie, it is not only the main actors, but the directors, writer, producer, and possibly the cinematographer, the chief editor, and a few others. If the movie is to be made, everyone else involved focuses their attention on these stars; afterwards, the stars usually go their separate ways, bringing together different entourages for their next performance.

    A Point Worth Repeating, Though Not Too Often

    This might be good point to add that since it is hard to get new attention by repeating exactly what you or someone else has done before, this new economy is based on endless originality, or at least attempts at originality. By contrast, the old industrial economy worked on the basis of making interchangeable objects in huge numbers. One could spend a lifetime of work in a factory, for instance, repeating the same motions over and over, polishing the same small area on car after car, for instance. And it was such repetition that allowed standard prices for things and standard wages for definite jobs to make sense. The entire money system is based on the simultaneous inter-changeability of units of money, on the one hand, and of standardized goods on the other. One dollar is as good as another; one quart of non-fat milk is as good as another; both statements must be true, or non-fat milk will have no price.

    With the endless originality and diversity of the attention economy, that kind of exchange is no longer possible. Even though one can loosely compare amounts of attention paid to different performances, attention does not come in precise, indistinguishable units, and neither does the illusory attention for which it is exchanged.

    Organizations Diminish as Transparency Grows

    Again, I digress. Let me return to the thread I have been trying to follow: the breakdown of organizational barriers. The Web and other media aid this development by allowing you to look behind the scenes as easily as at them. Gossip, interviews, biographies of individuals involved in specific efforts, photos, videos of rehearsals, documentaries of pre-performance steps, all are visible or can be visible on the Web, taking equal status with the final performances themselves. Documentaries about the production of movies are common by now; a movie about a movie is just as accessible as the first movie.

    This transparency will even more be the case in the very near future, and, as a result, organizations will diminish in importance at rapid pace, relative to the importance of the individuals who are temporarily in them. Even as stable and long-lasting an institution as Harvard will be less its familiar buildings and more the people in the buildings, and the networks of attention among them. And whether these people are physically at Harvard or somewhere else will matter less and less, until the institution loses all coherence, all distinctness from other universities or from any one of hundreds of other organizations which have audiences in common.

    In a full-fledged attention economy the goal is simply to get either enough attention or as much as possible. Recall now what I pointed out earlier: if you have a person's full attention, you can get them to perform physical acts, ranging from moving their eyes to follow you, to raising their hands, to applauding, to bringing you a glass of water, to handing you a sandwich, or, as is not uncommon in the case of rock groupies or sports fans, having sex with you (to cite a notorious example). Just as a parent paying attention to a child fills its material wants and desires, so a fan, that is anyone paying attention can feel an obligation or a desire to do the same for whomever they are paying attention to.

    Material Things Reinterpreted

    In an attention economy as confined as a conference of this sort, the material goods such as a snack or a sandwich come from outside the system. If the whole world is an attention economy, then making material goods, growing food from scratch in a garden or on a farm, or obtaining resources in any other fashion, and ultimately turning these over to you can be a direct act of attention paying. Thus, if you have enough attention, you can get anything you want. If you don't have enough your options will be distinctly more limited, but supplying you with some range of items, produced in a fairly automated fashion, can also be a successful form of paying you illusory attention, in return for some real attention that you pay to whomever is apparently doing this for you.

    Wealth and Property Take New Forms, Too

    One lesson to draw is that material goods and the acts of producing them are only secondary in an attention economy. quote What is primary is attention in the form of hanging on your every word or gesture. Paying attention in that sense is not over when its over. If what I say to you today makes any impression at all, for instance, you will remember me as well as some of the message for some time, possibly even for the rest of you life. Even if you find what I say outrageous or stupid, it will be easier for you to tune into me the next time I come across your field of vision, however that might happen. That is, getting attention is not a momentary thing; you build on the stock you have every time you get any, and the larger your audience at one time, the larger your potential audience in the future. Thus obtaining attention is obtaining a kind of enduring wealth, a form of wealth that puts you in a preferred position to get anything this new economy offers.

    Wealth that can endure and sometimes be added to is what we mean by property. Thus, in the new economy attention itself is property. Where is it? Primarily it is located in the minds of those who have paid you attention in the past, whether years ago or seconds ago. You may have forgotten all about some children's author whose books you had read to you as a child, but if you come across the book again, your memory will very likely be reawakened. Likewise you will remember actors you saw on television, sports figures who captured your attention in the past, professors, teachers, politicians, business leaders, etc. Thus, attention wealth can apparently decline, only to revive later. It is rarely entirely lost.

    Seeing this kind of wealth as property suggests a strategy for maintaining and enlarging what you have that is far different from what is usually considered to be the case when dealing with ideas or information. Suppose you get attention through some text you send out over the Internet. Would you want your audience to copy this and pass it on to others who might pay attention in turn? Of course you would. It would be insane to want to stop or restrain such copying, since that would deprive you of much attention you could otherwise get. This is an area, clearly, where the new economy and the old are at sharp odds. Thus the fight over intellectual property and rights to make copies is actually a struggle between the outlooks of the new economy and the old, a reason why they cannot both coexist forever, and thus a feature of the period of transition from old to new.

    Money and Attention

    So let's now take up the topic of this of transition, which has been underway for some time and will loom still larger in the next few years. I have described the attention economy itself without saying anything about the role of money in it, which was easy because in a pure attention economy money has no essential function, no real role to play. In the period of transition from old economy to new, however, the connection between money and attention is significant and needs examining. If you have a lot of attention, you are a star of one sort or another, and we all know that these days stars generally have little trouble obtaining money in large amounts. Just think of the amounts that go to movie stars, sports stars, or even leading politicians or generals who retire to the lecture circuit or propose to oversee the ghostwriting of their memoirs. And if they have some pet project, such as a movie they want to make or a cause they want supported they can often influence their publics or bankers to cough up many millions more.

    Within the framework I have suggested, there is little mystery as to why this should be. If fans are willing to do anything up to some limit for stars, such as wait in long lines to see them perform, avidly make sure to be there when they come to town, applaud them and sing their praises however they can, often paying more attention to stars than to members of their own families and so on, then it should come as no surprise that fans are also willing to pay out money at the stars' behest. It is just one more way to follow a star's wishes.

    In other words, money now flows along with attention, or, to put this in more general terms, when there is a transition between economies, the old kind of wealth easily flows to the holders of the new. Thus, when the market-based, proto-industrial economy first began to replace the feudal system of Western Europe, in which the prime form of wealth was aristocratic lineage and inheritance of land, both the noble titles and the lands that went with them soon ended up disproportionately in the hands of those who were good at obtaining what was then the new kind of wealth, namely money.

    With considerable ease, the rising merchant and industrialist class could buy old titles, induce governments to grant them brand new ones, or marry into the old impoverished gentry. The parallel today, again, is that possessors of today's rising kind of wealth, which is attention, and whom we label stars of every sort, have an easy time getting money.

    But now let me point out that the other way round doesn't work nearly as easily. Contrary to what you are sometimes urged to believe, money cannot reliably buy attention. Suppose it did work that way. Then you could have been paid to sit here and listen closely even if I were to read you something as boring as the phone book or an unabridged dictionary. Presumably it wouldn't even matter if I kept repeating the same few syllables over and over. If money could reliably buy attention, all I would have to do is pay you the required amount and you would keep listening carefully through all that, not falling asleep en masse, nor allowing your minds to wander. In truth, even if you had been paid a huge sum, this would be most difficult, and if you did it, it would be a testament more to your own deep sense of principle than to a general condition in which another roomful of similar people could be expected to do equally well.

    Someone who wants your attention just can't rely on paying you money to get it, but has to do more, has to be interesting, that is must offer you illusory attention, in just about the same amounts as they would if you had instead been paying money to listen to them -- which by the way is closer to the case here. Money flows to attention, and much less well does attention flow to money.

    Business as Performance

    There are exceptions, if only in a peculiar way. Business is still a lively spectator sport for instance, and just as we care about who is the best or the record breaker in football or basketball or any other such game, so we are interested in who heads lists like the Forbes 400 of those with the most money. According to some, like Ted Turner, who are on that list, in fact the main motive for trying to earn still more boils down to wanting to be recognized as number one. Presumably, Bill Gates might want to hold the record for more annual first-place finishes than anyone else. Even in this regard however, when the amount of monetary wealth you have draws attention to you, the price of such fame keeps going up. Even more literally does that happen in the well-known cases of the ultra-rich seeking political office. The price they must pay per vote keeps rising, and no matter how good the advertising geniuses they hire, they have to be good at attracting attention on their own.

    Bill Gates is also a good example of how even monetary fortunes of his magnitude are in larger and larger measure just covers for stardom. A century ago, Gates' analog would have been John D. Rockefeller, leader and chief owner of the Standard Oil Trust. His wealth consisted chiefly of oil fields, oil wells, tanker cars, refineries, and so on -- material things that would have been worth just as much if someone else bought him out. Rockefeller could have sold his interests and still kept about the same net worth, which is what monetary net worth is supposed to mean. But the share value of a company such as Microsoft is already far more a result of attention-getting and the star process. Its future sales, for instance, largely depend on software that is yet to be completely designed.

    If Gates were to decide to sell out and buy control of the XYZ Corp. instead of staying at the helm of Microsoft, as soon as he let this be known, his Microsoft stock would fall precipitously and XYZ's would rise. His own net worth would plummet, at least temporarily, but such is the attention wealth he has, that as soon as he began to issue pronouncements from his new stage, XYZ's stock would probably rise further, and Gates' former monetary wealth might magically reappear. Despite the fact that the arena in which he made his mark happens to be business, it is already true that Gates' actual wealth, and that of many like him, is less in money or shares of stock than in attention.

    Further Expectations

    I hope that by now you have some sense that there is far more to discuss here or to think about than I can conveniently explain or you can take in at one sitting. So let me now just summarize a few developments that seem reasonable to expect over the next decade or so:

    • A continuing rapid rise in the number of people attached to the Web and trying to get attention through it.

    • A continuing growth in the capacity of those on the Web to send out multimedia or virtual reality signals, and thus to capture attention through all these means. Say you are primarily a writer of mere words, i.e. text; still, on the Web you will be able to supplement your writings with your picture, with video images, with recordings of your voice, with interviews or pieces of autobiography. The advantage of doing that is that by offering potential readers a more vivid and rounded sense of who you are, you can both increase their sense of who it is who is offering them illusory attention, and have them have a clearer and more definite feeling than otherwise of what it is like to pay attention to you, rather than to some other writer of similar sounding words. Both these effects can help you hold their attention better. This of course helps explain why authors' pictures are so commonly stuck on book jackets, and increasingly on the front cover rather than the back.

    • All this and more will make the Web a better and better means of transmitting and circulating attention, a circulation that is essential for a full-fledged economy to emerge. To show that most strikingly, consider an author in the distant past, say the ancient Greek philosopher Aristotle. Over the past than two thousand years and more, his writings have gotten the direct attention of probably millions of readers. Still, except for contributing to his "immortality," the vast majority of that attention did him little personal good, since it came when he, along with all known descendants, had been long dead. Very few of today's attention getters can expect to remain in the public eye for thousands of years, but they do have a far better shot at reaping the benefits of attention from millions of people through the Web while they are still alive. Thus they can live, and live well, in the new economy.

    • Individual attention getters of all sorts will find it ever easier to get attention directly through the Web, without any corporate packaging necessary. They will also find diminishing advantage in trying to make use of money, since attention in a wider and wider a variety of forms, filling more and more of their needs will be able to flow to them either directly through the Web, or as a kind of adjunct to it.

    • Companies of all kinds will have less definite and fixed structures, since they will be structured not by physical walls and buildings, but through the Net itself, and more and more of their proceedings will be done in the full glare of Web attention, as temporary and rapidly re-forming projects. This means that companies will be unable to provide even what loyalty they do now to their employees, or say, in the case of publishers, to authors who have signed with them. Just as baseball stars move around from team to team or TV stars from network to network, so employee loyalties to companies will decrease as well. What will matter more for everyone is the stars one has particular loyalty to, or the Net communities of which one is a part and through which one gets attention.

    • Attention transactions, which already are far more numerous than monetary transactions will come to dominate even further. So even if you have lots of money, you will find it less and less convenient or worthwhile to bother to use it. As a result, our deeply ingrained desire for monetary recompense will begin to fade as well.

    Advice for the Transition

    All this means that the changeover to total domination by the new economy, while by no means complete or about to be, is moving very rapidly and is already quite far along, and probably unstoppable. Any individual today who fails to take that into account in her or his personal plans may be in for a rude awakening. Efforts that fit in with the overall flow of things are far more likely to work to your benefit than those that ignore them or are consciously opposed.

    Say for example you work for a book publisher today. If you have any sense, you understand your employer as temporary. You will either strive to achieve stardom through what you do in your current job directly - say by being a great editor, a great marketer of books, a very visible cover designer or something of the sort - or (and this is not an exclusive but an inclusive or) you will want to be as visible and indispensable a part of what I call the entourages of bigger stars, so that through them you can get indirect attention. Your interest in your company's success as such is like a Major League baseball player's interest in his current team's success, something that can help him shine, and valuable to the extent that it does, but less valuable if it keeps him from displaying what he does best.

    Simply amassing money (say by investing a large chunk of your salary in stocks) is not necessarily the best strategy if you believe you can do that without bothering to capture and in some way maintain some attention of your own. Even if the stock market never goes down, money, like the aristocratic titles of the past, may turn out to be less and less meaningful in the future.

    A publisher also has to decide how to deal with the Internet. At present, for instance, it is impractical to distribute books directly over the Net, though it is easy to foresee that need not be the case for long. We still do understand material things as objects that generally are to be bought and sold in exchange for money, but we also understand that more people are likely to pay attention to a book if they find out about it than if they don't. So in the case of a book, the Internet should now be viewed as a useful and free publicity mechanism. Let passages be freely copied and circulated on the Net, because most of the time, the more of copying that takes place, the more customers there will be for the physical printed version. If you have a Web site, don't charge for it, because that will only reduce the attention it gets. If you can't figure out how to afford it without charging, you may be doing something wrong.

    In due time, publishing companies as such will hardly be necessary, for actual physical books will be seen as cumbersome and quaint. quote Still, many of the kinds of tasks once performed by publishing company employees such as acquisition and line editors, designers, publicists, and so, will still be done, but on much more ad hoc and free-lance, eventually even unpaid basis. All of this will take place over the Web. No one will earn monetary profits from it. And this disappearance of the involvement of capital will be equally the case for attention-getting objects of just about any sort.

    A Closing Scenario

    Money will not necessarily fade in value, in other words inflation will not set in, in the old sense; neither will recession nor deflation. Instead, money will just lose importance, just as noble titles have over the past few centuries. The stock market might not even fall; stockholders may simply lose interest, ceasing to sell and buy in equal ratio.

    Am I speaking about the far future? I think not. Already, if you are reading this, you are probably involved in far more organized person-to-person or audience-type situations where what is being exchanged is attention, real and illusory, than you are in direct monetary transactions or the direct production of material goods. The fraction of time spent in pursuits more closely tied to the new economy is, even now, well above fifty per cent and rising. The new practices are already almost fully functioning for some, and more and more in place for others.

    The End

    At the end of the feudal period, the pomp and display of the nobility reached a level never before attained; the most gorgeous armor, the most magnificent tournaments of knights, the most elaborate ceremonies between rival nobles, the most brilliant marriages, the greatest interest in noble lineage. But by then it had lost all real function or importance. So today, when the stock market goes up and up, when money wealth itself seems a source of fame more than ever, when being number one on Forbes 400 list seems the height of perfection, when every basketball superstar wants a contract that is at least a million more than the last record one, we seem to be more dazzled by money than ever, just as we seem to be more intrigued by material goods than ever. But these interests are superficial and faddish. They are signs of decadence not of a glorious future for the money economy. Even in themselves they speak to the growing desire for attention, the need for it as well. Money is now little more numbers, one number among many, and as a source of lasting attention it can fade in an instant. The attention economy is already here, and more completely so every day.

    The Author

    Michael H. Goldhaber is completing a book on the attention economy. Formerly a theoretical physicist, a Fellow of the Institute for Policy Studies in Washington, D. C. and editor of Post-Industrial Issues, he is currently head of his own think tank, The Center for Technology and Democracy, and is a visiting scholar at UC Berkeley's institute for the Study of Social Change. is previous book was Reinventing Technology.

    His Web site is http://www.well.com/user/mgoldh/ E-mail: mgoldh@well.com
    Michael H. Goldhaber, 1997

    Notes

    The conference was on "Economics of Digital Information," hosted by the Kennedy School of Government , Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., January 23-26, 1997.

    1. To be more exact, in Western Europe as whole, feudalism as an economic system reached its high point around the eleventh or twelfth century (i.e. between 1000 and 1200). After that the market economy began its slow rise. But the outward forms and ways of thinking long remained feudal, certainly in the Iberian peninsula whence the first explorers came. In the Americas, where feudal systems hadn't previously existed, they were unable to compete with the new economic ways that most of the settlers brought with them. As is most obvious in the case of the Puritan colonists in New England, many of these settlers quite consciously had come to escape the old forms of rule. The "Puritan Ethic" they brought with them was much more suitable to a capitalistic, market economy than to feudalism. The great text that argues the last point (though ignoring earlier economic history) is Max Weber, 1958. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. New York: Scribner.

    2. Just as settlers in the Americas fashioned the geography they found to fit their purposes and values, so cyberspace is being shaped largely by those who want a space for their own new purposes. As I suggest elsewhere (Michael Goldhaber, 1986. Reinventing Technology. New York: Routledge & Kegan Paul) technology (such as that which goes into cyberspace) is shaped by the values of those who create it and it then helps promote those values, in the main, as it allows certain actions and not others. In the case of the kinds of technology (such as software) that make up cyberspace, the users play a very large role in deciding in what directions the technology as a whole will advance, and their underlying purposes and values are more in the direction of the new economy I will outline than the old.

    3. Despite its seeming generality, the following definition, (Paul Samuelson, 1973. Economics. New York: McGraw-Hill, p. 3) as read by millions of students of basic economics, shows why this new thinking must be very basic:

    Economics is the study of how men and society end up choosing, with or without the use of money, to employ scarce productive resources that could have alternate uses, to produce various commodities and distribute them for consumption, now or in the future among various people and groups in society. It analyzes the costs and benefits of improving patterns of resource allocation.
    As will become evident, "employing scarce productive resources," "produc[ing] various commodities and distributing them for consumption" and "improving patterns of resource allocation" are simply not relevant for what I will argue is unfolding. Nor is this a particularly perspicacious way of examining older economies, .e.g. feudalism.

    4. On attention's scarcity and its economic importance, see also Michael H. Goldhaber, 1989. "Equality and Education in America Now," In: Education and the American Dream, H. Holtz, I. Marcus, J. Dougherty, J. Michaels, and R. Peduzzi (eds.), Granby, Mass.: Bergin & Garvey, Chapter 6, pp. 70-76; Michael H. Goldhaber, 1992. "The Attention Society," Release 1.0, ( 26 March), No. 3, E. Dyson (ed.), New York, EDventure Holdings, pp. 1-20; Michael H. Goldhaber, 1992. "Attention: The System of Post Industrialism?" Z papers, Vol. 1, No. 2 (April-June); and, Michael H. Goldhaber, 1996-97, Web site: http://www.well.com/user/mgoldh/

    I still remember the thunderclap of insight that attention, not information is the key to the new system, a thought that struck me in 1984. While the details I present about the new economy stem from my own explorations, the fact that the following people, among others, have independently arrived at similar conclusions about the economic centrality of attention scarcity adds weight to the argument. See, for example, Richard Lanham, 1994. "The Economics of Attention," Proceedings of 124th Annual Meeting, Association of Research Librarians, Austin, Texas, http://sunsite.berkeley.edu/ARL/Proceedings/124/ps2econ.html or W. Thorngate, 1988. "On Paying Attention." In: Recent Trends in Theoretical Psychology, W. Baker, L. Mos, H. VanRappard, and H. Stam (eds.), New York: Springer-Verlag, (pp. 247-264), or W. Thorngate, 1990. "The Economy of Attention and the Development of Psychology," Canadian Psychology/Psychologie Canadienne, Vol. 31, pp. 262-271.

    5. The rhetorician Kenneth Burke (in his 1931 book Counter-Statement, New York: Harcourt, Brace, p. 157) describes literary form in a very similar manner: "Form in literature is an arousing and fulfilling of desires."

    6. Controversy continues to swirl around this point. It is argued at length by Thomas K. Landauer ( in his 1995 book The Trouble with Computers, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press) among others. Erik Brynjolfsson and Lorin Hitt (1995, "Information Technology as a Factor of Production: The Role of Differences Among Firms," Econ. Innov. New Techn., Vol. 3, pp. 183-199) present data revealing an overall positive correlation between total amounts of spending on information technology and total output for Fortune 500 companies. However, they do not show an increase in labor productivity per se, as is commonly presumed to be the case. What is indisputable is in the two decades since the introduction of the personal computer and related technologies, national measured productivity growth was lower than in the two decades following World War II, when such technology was either non-existent or much more limited. That is totally the opposite from what intuitive estimates of the value of these technologies would suggest and what has repeatedly been predicted.


    While it would be impossible to thank everyone who has contributed to this lengthy project, I would like especially to thank Anatole Anton, Sandra Braman, Erik Brynjolfsson, Esther Dyson, Rishab Ghosh, William Gladstone, Nat Goldhaber, Peter Oppenheimer, Bruce Sterling, Edward Valauskas, and Terry Winograd for comments and/or encouragement that aided in the writing of this article. In addition I would like to thank Ilene Philipson. No one on this list should be held responsible for anything said here, however.


    Contents Index

    Copyright © 1997, ƒ ¡ ® s † - m ¤ ñ d @ ¥
    post!LXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate P !L ; +-ntry(b8iJ>bRA2"]<%/vurl 0http://www.bgsu.edu/departments/tcom/annota.htmmime text/htmlhntt"856018-10539-34b72167"hvrsdata Internet Economics: An Annotated Bibliography by Dr. Bruce Klopfenstein © 1997

    Internet Economics: An Annotated Bibliography
    © 1997 by Dr. Bruce C. Klopfenstein
    To be published in the Journal of Media Economics

    Introduction

    The Internet and World Wide Web are examples of new media technologies that, unlike many of their predecessors, exceeded expectations for adoption and did so dramatically. Indeed, media scholars have only recently begun to look at the Internet as a form of "mass" communication (Morris & Ogan, 1996; Newhagen & Rafaeli, 1996). The Internet and its future are inexorably tied to the economics that surround it (e.g., Marshall, 1996). Yet few media scholars in general or media economics scholars in particular are well versed in the economics that drive the Internet.

    The purpose of this paper is to introduce the reader to the key concepts of Internet economics via an annotated bibliography of current literature on the subject. McKnight and Bailey's (1997b) definition of Internet economics, for example, is included in that reference's annotation. Readers may seek references that treat the issues of greatest relevance to them. In the search for documents related to Internet economics, preference was given to those that serve as the most recent overviews to the subject. A few "classic" documents about the general history of the Internet are cited as well, and many of the other references include a history of the Internet in the context of their individual pieces. Documents were discovered via on-line searching of commercial research databases, reference lists from key resources, and searches of various World Wide Web (WWW) search engines. The author has been an Internet and new media user, researcher, teacher and writer (see Krol & Klopfenstein, 1996) for nearly 2 decades. He has written on the diffusion of new media and forecasting adoption of new media technologies.

    This piece follows the recommendations outlined by Blumenthal and Cosgrave (1997) for the construction of an annotated bibliography. Each entry is accompanied by a few sentences or more that attempt to give enough information to allow the reader to choose which sources to consult. Given the subject matter, it is not surprising that many of the references are available on-line. A few of the most valuable references to new students of Internet economics are Cawley (1997), MacKie-Mason and Varian (1997), McKnight and Bailey (1997a), McKnight and Bailey (1997b), Shenker (1996) and Werbach (1997). Varian (1997a and 1997b) and Economides (1997) offer online bibliographies related (but not specific) to Internet economics.

    The volume of works devoted to Internet economics can be overwhelming. Emphasis here is given to recent documents, particularly those with an introductory theme. Specifically excluded from this bibliography are papers that include mathematical models of Internet pricing and materials deemed inaccessible to scholars outside the field of economics. Also generally eliminated from this bibliography are trade and press stories on Internet economics, although a few representative citations and publications are included from this valuable literature.

    A few themes emerged from a literature search on Internet economics. One clear theme is the economically driven assumption that the Internet's current flat rate pricing system is inherently inefficient; a congestion sensitive and/or fee-based system is often recommended as a way to ease congestion and/or offer users some say in what priority their packets are given on the Internet. Related to these arguments is the prediction that without such intervention in Internet usage pricing, heavy traffic would force the Internet to collapse. Metcalfe (1995) spawned a flurry of trade and mainstream press inquiries into the stability of the Internet in 1996 (see Marshall, 1996; Schrader, 1997; and Why the Internet failed, 1997).

    Another recent theme in the Internet economics literature was the apparent schism between the local telephone companies (telcos) and Internet Service Providers (ISPs). ISPs are treated by the FCC as enhanced service providers (ESPs), therefore exempt from paying additional access charges to local exchange carriers (LECs). Bell Atlantic (1996) and Pacific Bell (1997) attempt to show the congestion they suffered due to Internet traffic while Selwyn and Laszlo (1997) is a strong rejoinder to such arguments. This debate is a precursor to another research topic: the probable consolidation of the ISP industry.

    Discussion of issues related to telecommunications technology often is overrun by acronyms, and the Internet is no exception. The previous paragraph offers an infinitesimal taste of the alphabet soup that often consumes a discussion related to the Internet and Internet economics. For this reason, references have been included to a few glossaries below, and citations of documents with good glossaries are made as appropriate. These include Egan (1996), Electronic Frontier Foundation (n.d.), Krol and Klopfenstein (1996), and Villasis (1996).

    The commercialization of the Internet is a recent phenomenon. Researchers in media economics, new media technologies, and communication policy have a role to play in the continuing evolution of the Internet. Its future is not predetermined but will be molded by innovations in technology and thinking, and the pursuit of policy goals that try to balance user needs with economic stability. This work is one attempt to help bring scholars outside the burgeoning field of Internet economics into this dynamic, growing and vital area.

    The Annotated Bibliography

    Anania, L. & Solomon, R.J. (1997). Flat--The minimalist price. In L. W. McKnight, & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.). Internet Economics (pp. 91-118). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    Anania and Solomon studied the parameters constraining historical network pricing models in 1986 in order to forecast the implications for future broadband networks. Their resulting 1988 paper is reproduced here as the authors make a case for flat rate Internet pricing. A nice summary table of the U.S. common carrier model of telephony is presented. The reproduced 1988 piece reviews three systems: 1) "carrier based" telephone, telegraph and railroad; 2) transitional service-dedicated analog/digital; and 3) integrated, fiber-based, all digital and switched broadband.

    Babe, R. E. (Ed.). (1994). Information and communication in economics. Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers.

    This collection of papers is not specific to Internet economics but can be used to establish a context for critical analysis of the economics of information networks. Contributors from the areas of communication and economics representing universities in Canada, Great Britain, the U.S., and Australia investigate aspects the economics of information. Several of the twelve chapters are followed by critical responses. Babe's own "The Place of Information in Economics" and its extensive bibliography is especially notable.

    Bailey, H. (n.d.). World-Wide Web telecoms virtual library: Journals and other electronic media [On-line]. Available: http://www.analysys.com/vlib/journal.htm

    This is an updated list of periodicals related to telecommunications including the trade press. Many of the cited magazines have on-line versions, and the trade press is one good way to stay current with issues related to Internet economics. Although extensive, the list is not exhaustive and does not include BoardWatch among others.

    Bailey, J. P. (1997). The economics of Internet interconnection agreements. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.). Internet Economics (pp. 155-168). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This chapter explores four interconnection agreement models from economic, technical and policy perspectives. Incentives for Internet connectivity (and one reason why the march toward Internet connection continues) are covered including "positive network externalities," the benefit (or cost) that the user of a network derives from an additional person using the same network.

    Bailey, J. P. (1995). Internet economics. Massachusetts Institute of Technology: Research Program on Communications Policy [On-line]. Available: WWW URL http://rpcp.mit.edu/Pubs/inet_econ/abstract.html

    This working paper explores the growing field of Internet economics, encompassing the technology, economics, and policy surrounding the Internet. Bailey explores the issue of usage sensitive pricing versus flat-fee pricing as applied to the Internet and provides anecdotal evidence to support general views that communities have towards pricing issues. It identifies obstacles to implement usage sensitive pricing on the Internet. See also McKnight and Bailey (1997a).

    Bell Atlantic (1996, March). Report of Bell Atlantic on Internet traffic [On-line]. Available: http://www.ba.com/ea/fcc/report.htm

    Bell Atlantic produced and submitted this report to the FCC. RBOCs like Bell Atlantic have tried to persuade the FCC that Internet Service Providers should not be allowed to continue their enhanced service provider exemption from paying time sensitive access charges. ISPs instead lease telco business lines that are paid on a flat monthly fee. Sections of this document include reports on the impact of Internet service on Bell Atlantic's network. Selwyn and Laszlo (1997) is a response to the RBOC position by the ISP industry.

    Bell, R. (1997, July/August). Internet services impact telecommunications infrastructure. Onforum [On-line]. Available http://www.onforum.com/fr-art1.htm

    This is a very accessible paper written about the technical problems heavy Internet use is causing for the voice network. While the current telephone network is designed to handle several calls per hour at a few minutes per call, Internet access does not follow this model. Bell also details what happens when users access the Internet via their dial-up ISP and how the Internet becomes congested. This is a very useful read for the relatively uninitiated.

    BoardWatch [On-line]. Available: http://www.boardwatch.com/

    BoardWatch is a magazine originally created for bulletin board service (BBS) providers. As BBS providers became ISPs, BoardWatch evolved into a publication for ISPs. This is an excellent source for understanding Internet issues from the point of view of the ISP.

    Blumenthal, M. S. (1996). Architecture and economic policy. Telecommunications Policy, 20(3), 161-167.

    Expertise in economics and computer network technology must be combined to assess how the industrial base for information infrastructure is evolving with options for relevant competitive strategy and public policy. A set of papers on the economics of the Internet and the ideas behind this introduction to them were prepared for a cross-disciplinary panel at the 1995 Telecommunications Policy Research Conference (see Brock, 1996). An overview of the papers is presented by Blumenthal.

    Brock, G. W. (Ed.). (1995). Toward a competitive telecommunication industry: Selected papers from the 1994 Telecommunications Policy Research Policy Conference. Mahwah, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

    This book was published as the discourse related to network economics began shifting from the National (and Global) Information Infrastructure (NII) to the Internet and World Wide Web (Kahin, 1997, shows that this actually happened near the start of 1994). Although these papers are not all Internet specific, many are applicable to the Internet. There are sections on "Universal Service" and "The Internet and the NII."

    Brock, G. W., & Roston, G. L. (Eds.). (1996). The Internet and telecommunications policy: Selected papers from the 1995 Telecommunications Policy Research Policy Conference. Mahwah, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

    Few of the papers published here are specifically related to Internet economics. They include M. L. Katz, "Economic Efficiency, Public Policy, and the Pricing of Network Interconnection under the Telecommunications Act of 1996;" J. Haring and J. H. Rohlfs, "Telecommunications Pricing for Efficient Local Competition;" D. D. Clark, "Combining Sender and Receiver Payments in the Internet;" and several papers related to Internet commerce among other topics.

    Brody, H. (1995, May/June). Internet at the crossroads: $$$. Technology Review (98)4, 24-31.

    The author is a senior editor of Technology Review. This article was produced on the eve of the NSF's no longer paying to operate the NSFNet backbone network. Expectations for digital congestion are explored as the Internet continues its move toward commercial support. This is a synopsis of where things stood as of early 1995.

    Brownlee, N. (1997). Internet pricing in practice. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 77-90). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    Nevil Brownee is responsible for New Zealand's University of Auckland's campus network. He briefly describes the history of the Internet in New Zealand including its system of usage based pricing, a commonly perceived solution to Internet congestion in the United States.

    Cawley, R. A. (1997). Interconnection, pricing, and settlements: Some healthy jostling in the growth of the Internet. In B. Kahin & J. H. Keller (Eds.), Coordinating the Internet (pp. 346-376). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This is perhaps the most detailed of several papers on Internet settlements in Kahin and Keller (1997). Cawley, of the European Commission, examines the issue of settlements and financial transfers within the Internet and between Internet Service Providers (ISPs). The chapter examines settlement agreements in the context of the role of public policy in encouraging continued international Internet growth. The paper includes an excellent review of the recent history of Internet settlements.

    Clark, D. D. (1997). Internet cost allocation and pricing. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 215-252). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    Dr. Clark heads the Advanced Network Architecture group at the MIT Laboratory for Computer Science. This chapter reviews Internet services and their allocation by generally technical rather than economic means. A need is growing to distinguish between highly variable object sizes on the Internet. Clark examines several pricing schemes before proposing "expected capacity pricing." The author notes that there currently is no agreed upon way to predict the value of services to users.

    Clark, D. D. (1996). Adding service discrimination to the Internet. Telecommunications Policy, 20(3), 169-181.

    This is part of a special issue of Telecommunications Policy on "Lessons from the Internet." Clark writes that a mechanism is needed to control the actual allocation of Internet bandwidth; user (not necessarily "usage") based pricing is needed to regulate the use of this allocation. The Internet today allocates bandwidth among the instantaneous users without making any explicit commitment as to rate or any other service quality. Some schemes for bandwidth allocation include: 1) guaranteed minimum capacity service, an assured worst case rate along the path from a source to a specific destination, 2) fair allocation service, assuring the various users that they are being treated in an equitable way relative to each other, 3) dynamic bidding for access, where each packet carries a bid (a price that the user is willing to pay for service) and 4) priority scheduling, which creates service classes of different priorities to serve users with different needs.

    Cohill, A. M. & Kavanaugh, A. L. (Eds.), Community networks: Lessons from Blacksburg, Virginia. Boston: Artech House.

    This book includes detailed discussions of the hardware and telephone charges associated with local Internet connection. This is a "hands on" look at the actual costs involved with setting up a community network.

    Commercial Internet Exchange (1995, March). White paper: A telecommunications policy framework for Internet service providers. Herdon, VA: Author. Available: http://www.cix.org/Archive/1996/Reports/tcomm-wp.html

    The Commercial Internet eXchange Association is a trade association for Internet Service Providers around the world and a public interconnection junction founded by most of the Internet backbone providers.. This document includes economic, technical and interconnection goals for ISPs. The material is relevant for historical reasons but will become obsolete as regulatory changes and decisions are made.

    Crawford, D. W. (1997). Internet services: A market for bandwidth or communication? In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 379-400). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    The title of this book chapter may be misleading to communication scholars. The work examines proposed congestion pricing schemes for the Internet. A table comparing network types (e.g., mail, electricity, telephone, water, etc.) by characteristic is included.

    Economides, N. (1997, June 3). Bibliography on network economics [On-line]. Leonard N. Stern School of Business, New York University [On-line]. Available: http://raven.stern.nyu.edu/networks/biblio_hframe.html

    According to its author, this is an interactive bibliography on the economics of networks and related subjects. While extensive, its entries specific to Internet economics is limited. Economides is professor of economics at NYU and author of Economides (1996).

    Economides, N. (1996). The Economics of networks. International Journal of Industrial Organization, 16(4), 673-699. Available: http://raven.stern.nyu.edu/networks/top.html

    This piece is not limited to the Internet or telecommunications networks in general. Economides refers to networks as including transportation, communications, information, and railroad networks. Because much Internet networking research is based on the same concepts as used in other networks, this article is very good for background information on network economics and the only citation like it in this bibliography. Among others, Economides analyzes the issues of compatibility, coordination to technical standards, interconnection and interoperability, and their effects on pricing and quality of services and on the value of network links in various ownership structures. Over 60 references are cited in this paper.

    Egan, B. (1996). Information superhighways revisited: The economics of multimedia. Boston: Artech House.

    This is not a book about Internet economics, but it does include a chapter on the economics of broadband networks and a glossary of selected economic and cost terms. Egan also authored Information superhighways: The economics of advanced public communication networks in 1991 with Artech House.

    Einhorn, M. A. (1995). Pricing and competition policies for the Internet. In B. Kahin & J. Keller (Eds.), Public access to the Internet (pp. 338-349). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This paper discusses Internet access into the future with an eye to subsidies for schools, libraries, hospitals and other customers. Einhorn concludes that future Internet service offerings should vary by bandwidth and hours of use, competition between providers should drive down prices, and general tax dollars (not an Internet tax) should be used to subsidize access for schools, libraries and possibly hospitals.

    Electronic Frontier Foundation (n.d.). The Lingo [Internet glossary] [On-line]. Available: http://www.eff.org/papers/eegtti/eeg_271.html

    This is one of the more commonly cited on-line (or other) dictionaries of Internet terms. It is part of the Electronic Frontier Foundation's Extended Guide to the Internet. An Internet glossary can come in handy when discussing net topics such as Internet economics. Another glossary is located at http://whatis.com/.

    Engle, M., Blumenthal, A. & Cosgrave, T. (1997, February 13). How to prepare an annotated bibliography [On-line]. Ithica, New York: Cornell University Library. Available: http://www.library.cornell.edu/okuref/research/skill28.htm

    Farnon, M., & Huddle, S. (1997). Settlement systems for the Internet. In B. Kahin & J. H. Keller (Eds.), Coordinating the Internet (pp. 377-403). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This paper is an overview of Internet settlement agreements from the point of view of an Internet service provider (the authors are with MCI). A history of settlement agreements is also presented with the authors claiming that the current system now in use is flawed. Several potential settlement agreements based on variables such as traffic volume and network size are presented.

    Ferguson, C. H. (1997). The Internet, economic growth, and telecommunications policy. [On-line.] Available: http://www-eecs.mit.edu:80/people/ferguson/telecom/

    This substantial, on-line work analyzes policy issues related to future local telecommunications services including the infrastructure needed for Internet services. Ferguson concludes that neither the Telecommunications Act of 1996 nor FCC policy give Internet and/or Enhanced Service Providers (ISPs/ESPs) sufficient interconnection and collocation rights with respect to monopoly local exchange telephone carriers (LECs). This creates entry barriers, retards technical progress, and may cause network congestion. Several reforms are recommended (including disclosure of corporate spending on academic policy research).

    Fowler, T. B. (1997, February). Internet access and pricing: Sorting out the options. Telecommunications, 31(20), 44-52.

    The ubiquity and high bandwidth of the Internet implies that bandwidth on demand will become a reality. Fowler, an engineer, sees a paradigm shift underway that will run its course in the next 15 years. This readable, but detailed article reviews current technology and bandwidth pricing before offering prescriptions for the future.

    General Magic (1997). Internet trends [On-line]. Available: http://www.genmagic.com/Internet/Trends/

    Tony Rutkowski has maintained a database on Internet growth statistics including the growth in the number of Internet hosts. These data are available at this site. General Magic is involved in mobile (wireless) Internet technologies and services.

    Gilder, G. (1993, September 13). Metcalfe's law and legacy. Forbes (ASAP Supplement), pp. 158-166.

    Robert Metcalfe (sometimes misspelled Metcalf) is the inventor of Ethernet and the founder of 3Com Corporation. According to Moore's Law, the power and silicon computer chips doubles every 18 months. Gilder credits Metcalfe for coming up with another law, this one applied to telecommunications networks: connect any number, "n," of machines (computers, phones, cars, etc.) and the result is "n" squared potential value. In other words, the value of a network increases exponentially with the number of new users added to the network.

    Gupta, A., Stahl, D. O., & Whinston, A. B. (1995). Pricing of services on the Internet [On-line]. Available: http://cism.bus.utexas.edu/alok/pricing.html

    After studying models of Internet pricing among competing networks, researchers found that usage-based pricing can be far more profitable than flat monthly fees charged by most ISPs. The authors view on-line congestion and pending law suits against access providers as highlighting the short-sightedness of this pricing strategy. Their study found that Americans value time and are willing to pay for a guaranteed level of service. They recommend reducing the fixed fees and charge for usage that varies with the demand (e.g., peak and off-peak rates).

    Hallgren, M. M. & McAdams, A. K. (1997). The economic efficiency of Internet public goods. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 455-478). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This is a very readable introduction to the Internet as a public good. Economic terms are defined, a real boon for those not well versed in economic theory. The authors argue against the view that future development of the Internet should be (or even is currently) market driven. They prefer a model similar to a "University Model" in which the sharing of knowledge is the ultimate goal.

    Harvard Information Infrastructure Project (n.d.). [On-line]. Available: http://ksgwww.harvard.edu/iip/index.html

    The Harvard Information Infrastructure Project was founded in 1989 with projects on the commercialization of the Internet and policy development for information infrastructure. It has provided a forum for addressing a wide range of issues convening experts from government, industry, and academia (policy-makers, managers, economists, lawyers, political scientists, and technologists). This web site includes a bibliography of their works, draft and current conference papers, and a searchable database of policy papers.

    International Engineering Consortium (1997). Internet access tutorial [On-line]. Available: http://www.webproforum.com/lucent/index.html

    This is one of a growing number of technical tutorials available on-line under the auspices of the International Engineering Consortium. Because Internet economics and technology are so intertwined, knowledge of technical issues is relevant to the study of Internet economics. This tutorial describes existing and emerging access technologies used to provide Internet access for residential and business applications.

    InterNIC (1997). Internet documentation (RFC's, FYI's, etc.) and IETF information [On-line]. Available: http://www.internic.net/ds/dspg0intdoc.html

    This is a repository for documents and working drafts related to the Internet. The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) is the protocol engineering, development, and standardization arm of the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). InterNIC (Internet Network Information Center) helped take "control" of the Internet following the phasing out of NSF funding.

    Kahin, B. (1997). The U.S. National Information Infrastructure initiative: The market, the net, and the virtual project. In B. Kahin & E. Wilson (Eds.), National Information Infrastructure initiatives: Vision and policy designs (pp. 150-189). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This chapter is not on Internet economics, but does include a graph showing how the Internet replaced "national information infrastructure" in newspaper coverage beginning in late 1993. Kahin is joining the Clinton administration in 1997. Kahin outlines many of the policy implications of the network infrastructure.

    Kahin, B. (1995). The Internet and the National Information Infrastructure. In B. Kahin & J. Keller (Eds.), Public access to the Internet (pp. 3-23). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This chapter includes a section on the underlying economics of the Internet. The Internet is contrasted with two other models for the information superhighway: telephone and cable television. Although somewhat dated, this is a very accessible introduction to the economics of the Internet.

    Kahin, B. & Keller, J. (1997). (Eds.). Coordinating the Internet. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This is a collection of papers originally presented at a Harvard conference in September 1996. There is an excellent section of seven papers on the trademark controversies over WWW domain names (e.g., tiny Clue Computing's use of www.clue.com versus board game manufacturer Hasbro's claim on the name Clue). Another section of five papers is included under the heading of "Interconnections and Settlements."

    Kahin, B. & Keller, J. (1995). (Eds.). Public access to the Internet. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    A conference was held at the Harvard Information Infrastructure Project in 1993 on the subject and this is a compilation of papers presented there. One of the issues discussed involved how to ensure widespread, affordable access to the Internet. The papers, some of which are outdated, examine the technical, economic, and sociological issues underlying Internet access and policy. Kahin (1995) is one notable chapter. This collection is one of the first of its kind.

    Krol, E. & Klopfenstein, B. C. (1996). The whole Internet, academic edition: User's guide and catalog. Sebastopol, CA: O'Reilly & Associates.

    This is a revision of Krol's seminal 1994 work that was widely regarded as the bible of Internet books. It includes a detailed and authoritative history of the Internet.

    Kumar, B. (1997). Impact of Internet traffic on public telephone networks. New Telecom Quarterly, 5(1), 41-50.

    The author (from MCI) addresses the impacts and the implications of Internet traffic on the local exchange public network, including some background on the LEC network and the assumptions used in the design of telephone networks is provided. The characteristics of voice and Internet traffic are defined and how Internet traffic impacts the local network is discussed. Kumar offers some potential short-term and long-term solutions to traffic problems.

    Lawton, G. (1996, September). Building the Internet backbone. SunWorld Online [On-line]. Available: http://www.sun.com/sunworldonline/swol-09-1996/swol-09-nap.html

    The Internet's skeleton is made up of high-capacity trunk lines maintained by telephone companies at sites called Network Access Points or "NAPs." This paper outlines the role of NAPs, and profiles Pacific Bell's NAP in particular. A sidebar history of NAPs is included as well as web references to other NAP related resources.

    Lee, R. E. (1997, June). The emerging model of the Internet. SunWorld Online [On-line]. Available: http://www.sun.com/sunworldonline/swol-06-1997/swol-06-internet.html

    In the first of a series on the Internet's infrastructure at this on-line periodical, two questions are addressed: What are currently the biggest problems and issues surrounding the Internet and its rapid evolution? Who are the major players and what are their roles? Internet problems as of early 1997 are detailed.

    Leiner, B. M.; Cerf, V. G.; Clark, D. D.; Kahn, R. E.; Kleinrock, L.; Lynch, D. C.; Postel, J.; Roberts, L. G.; & Wolff, S. (1997). A brief history of the Internet (version 3.1) [On-line]. Available: http://info.isoc.org/internet-history/

    This is an extensive history of the Internet written by some of its own pioneers. The authors conclude with some speculations as to where the Internet is headed. This piece is complemented by Krol & Klopfenstein (1996).

    Lewis, P. H. (1996, December 17). An 'all you can eat' price is clogging Internet access. New York Times, p. A1.

    This New York Times article is a good example of the mainstream media's coverage of Internet congestion highlighted by America Online's conversion to a flat rate price of $19.95/month in December 1996.

    MacKie-Mason, J. K. (1996). Service architecture and content provision. Telecommunications Policy 20(3), 203-217.

    MacKie-Mason contrasts two competing visions for the future of the National Information Infrastructure: the application-blind architecture of the Internet and the application-aware architecture of cable television systems and on-line services prior to 1996. Among application-aware architectures, some are content-aware and some are content-blind. Some consequences of these different network architectures for content provision are examined.

    MacKie-Mason, J. K., Murphy, L., & Murphy, J. (1995, March). The role of responsive pricing in the Internet [On-line]. Paper presented to the MIT Workshop on Internet Economics March 1995. Available: http://www.press.umich.edu/jep/works/MackieResp.html

    This is an earlier, on-line version of MacKie-Mason, Murphy and Murphy (1997).

    MacKie-Mason, J. K., Murphy, L. & Murphy, J. (1997). Responsive pricing in the Internet. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 279-303) . Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    The authors argue that a new allocation scheme for Internet resource allocation is needed. They propose that a feedback signal in the form of a variable price for network service be implemented to help control Internet traffic. Incentives should be offered to encourage network users to place a value on aspects of that use which will, in turn, lead to more efficient Internet usage. They further argue against continuing flat rate pricing schemes for the Internet, and answer criticisms against the notion of responsive pricing.

    MacKie-Mason, J. K. & Varian, H. R. (1997). Economic FAQs about the Internet. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 27-62) . Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    An earlier version of this chapter was published in the Journal of Economic Perspectives (1994) and another version with the same authors and title appears on-line at http://www.spp.umich.edu/ipps/papers/info-nets/Economic_FAQs/FAQs/FAQs.html. FAQ is Internet lingo for "frequently asked questions" and this document includes their answers on a given topic such as Internet economics. Mackie-Mason and Varian cover the economic, institutional and technological structure of the Internet as well as some speculation on the future of the Internet. Questions and answers range from as simple as "What does 'speed' mean?" to as complex as "What non-price mechanisms can be used for congestion control?" One of the best available introductions to the Internet and Internet economics, this chapter includes a useful reference list as well.

    MacKie-Mason, J. K. & Varian, H. R. (1996). Some economics of the Internet. In B.W. Sichel & D. L. Alexander (Eds.), Networks, infrastructure, and the new task for regulation (pp. 107-136). Ann Arbor: The University of Michigan Press.

    The authors describe the history, technology and costs of the Internet and describe a "smart market" for pricing Internet congestion (see MacKie-Mason & Varian, 1995b). This is currently an oft-cited and criticized solution to Internet congestion. There is more attention to the smart market and less to other pricing considerations here than in MacKie-Mason and Varian (1995b).

    MacKie-Mason, J. K. & Varian, H. R. (1995a, March). Economic FAQs about the Internet [On-line]. Paper presented to the MIT Workshop on Internet Economics March 1995. Available: http://www.spp.umich.edu/ipps/papers/info-nets/Economic_FAQs/FAQs/FAQs.html

    See MacKie-Mason and Varian (1997) for an updated version of the same document. The on-line version is noted here for its ease of accessibility.

    MacKie-Mason, J. K. & Varian, H. R. (1995b). Pricing the Internet. In B. Kahin & J. Keller (Eds.), Public access to the Internet (pp. 269-314). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    MacKie-Mason and Varian review Internet technology and costs in this paper before discussing Internet pricing mechanisms. They then propose a possible model for pricing the Internet through what they call a "smart market" mechanism. This dynamic bidding system would price data packets almost instantaneously according to network congestion at the time of use. Data would be prioritized according to the willingness of the sender to pay for transmission.

    Marshall, J. (1996, November 4). Economics, not engineering, will unclog Internet. San Francisco Chronicle, p. E1.

    Metcalfe (1995) was a catalyst for this discussion. Marshall assumes the Internet is already congested and measures must be taken to correct this.

    McKnight, L. W. & Bailey, J. P. (1997a). An introduction to Internet economics. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 3-26). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    "Internet economics is the study of the market for Internet services (p. 3)", according to the authors. As an introduction to the edited book, Internet Economics, this piece is one of the better overviews of Internet economics available at the time of this writing. The limitation is that it includes an overview of the book's contents and, therefore, does not stand alone as well as an independent paper.

    McKnight, L. W. & Bailey, J. P. (Eds.). (1997b). Internet Economics. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    The editors of this book are two of the leading experts in the field of Internet economics. Some portions of this work are clearly directed at an audience reasonably well versed in network economics. The work is a derivative of a conference held at MIT in March 1995, and earlier versions of the papers were published in the Journal of Electronic Publishing (Turner, 1996). According to McKnight and Bailey (footnote 7, p. 7):

    By publishing an earlier version of this book as a special issue of the Journal of Electronic Publishing...we were able to disseminate the ideas and approaches suggested by the authors and solicit feedback prior to distributing the collected works in hard copy. We hope this period for further reflection on and refinement of the ideas and the text has improved the quality of this book, and served to stimulate cross-disciplinary dialogue.

    Each of the 20 chapters, many of which appear in this bibliography, has its own reference list. The book is divided into the following sections: "Introduction to Internet Economics," "The Economics of the Internet," "Interconnection and Multicast Economics," "Usage Sensitive Pricing," "Internet Commerce," and "Internet Economics and Policy." The book includes a list of acronyms but, unfortunately, no glossary of relevant terms.

    Metcalfe, B. (1995, December 4). From the ether: Predicting the Internet's catastrophic collapse and ghost sites galore in 1996. Infoworld, 17(49), p. 61.

    This column by Ethernet founder Robert Metcalfe about an impending 1996 Internet collapse set the stage for debates on the subject and heavy press coverage of technical glitches that year. The prediction was given one last chance to occur in December 1996 when industry leader AOL switched to a flat monthly $19.95 fee its subscribers. When the collapse did not happen, Metcalfe literally ate his words at a 1997 WWW conference. His original prediction and the attention it engendered might have help spur providers to ensure that such a collapse would, in fact, not happen.

    Miller, T. E. & Clemente, P. C. (1997, May). The 1997 American Internet user survey. Find/SVP [On-line]. Available: http://etrg.findsvp.com/internet/findf.html

    Find/SVP is a market research firm. This document includes highlights of ongoing, proprietary research studies of U.S Internet users and use.

    Morris, M. & Ogan, C. (1996). The Internet as mass medium. Journal of Communication, 46(1), 39-50.

    Morris and Ogan compare the Internet to traditional media of communication. This piece helps direct communication scholars into the study of the Internet including its economic characteristics.

    National Academy of Engineering (1995). Revolution in the U.S. information infrastructure. Washington, D.C.: National Academy Press.

    The technical session of the October 6, 1994 annual meeting of the National Academy of Engineering focused on the investments in the "information superhighway." The symposium addressed questions related to technical and economic factors that will determine the standards and marketplace demand for products and services, and the role the government and private industry should play in fostering infrastructure development in the next decade. Six papers are presented in this brief volume including Kahn (1995).

    Network Wizards. (1997). Internet Domain Survey. [On-line]. Available: http://www.nw.com/zone/WWW/top.html

    This site includes data on Internet growth as indicated by historical growth in the number of Internet hosts. Links to related sites are also included.

    Newhagen, J. E. & Rafaeli, S. (1996). Why communication researchers should study the Internet: A dialogue. Journal of Communication, 46(1), 4-13.

    Like Morris and Ogan (1996), this piece offers reasons why communication scholars should study the Internet. The same may be applied to students in media economics and communication policy. The Internet and WWW are not mutually exclusive from existing media technologies, but they are complementary if not completely converging.

    Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (1997). Communications Outlook 1997: Volume 1. Paris, France: author.

    This is the fourth in a series of biennial Communications Outlooks created to assist OECD members' analysis of communication policy. It includes a table of Internet host growth around the world and another on hosts per nation's inhabitants.

    Pacific Bell (1997). Surfing the "Second-Wave": Sustainable Internet growth and public policy [On-line]. Available: http://www.pactel.com/about/pub_policy/esp/WP-internet-part1.html

    This is PacBell's evidence that Internet congestion is harming its network facilities. This, like Bell Atlantic (1996), is one of the reports critiqued by Selwyn and Laszlo (1997). PacBell argues that the Enhanced Service Provider (ESP) exemption must be eliminated to encourage Internet Service (ISPs) to move Internet traffic off the voice network, and the development of data access technologies must not be burdened with regulations developed and intended for the current voice telephone market. The document includes data on consumer uses and traffic volumes on the PacBell networks.

    Pacific Bell Network Access Point - Statistics. (1997, July). [On-line]. Available: http://www.pacbell.com/products/business/fastrak/networking/nap/stats/

    A Network Access Point (NAP) is an exchange point for Internet traffic. Internet Service Providers (ISPs) connect their networks to the NAP for the purpose of exchanging traffic with other ISPs. Pacific Bell's San Francisco NAP is one of the four original National Science Foundation sponsored network access points for the Internet infrastructure. Current traffic data are displayed graphically at this site.

    Phillips, B. (1997, April 1). Hyperlinks -- How tomorrow's routers will hold the net together. OEM Magazine 538 [On-line]. Available: http://www.techweb.com/se/directlink.cgi?OEM19970401S0027

    This article relates to the LEC-ISP conflict over flat rates and Internet congestion. Phillips is a journalist who discusses the technology of routers (the devices that determine where to send Internet data packets) and how it promises to handle increased Internet traffic. The publication's readers include manufacturers of routers.

    Randall, D. (1997). Consumer strategies for the Internet: Four scenarios. Long Range Planning, 30(2), 157-168.

    A scenario planning process for building successful World Wide Web related businesses is presented. In addition to outlining five tips for Internet content providers, four alternative scenarios for the future of the Internet are described, and sixteen most relevant drivers of those scenarios are identified. See also Randall (1996).

    Randall, D. (1996, August). Internet scenarios for consumer-oriented content providers [On-line]. Available: http://equity.wharton.upenn.edu/~dougla03/whitepa.htm

    Randall reviews three current economic models for the Internet: advertising, subscription, and pay per use. Hybrids also exist such as ESPN and the San Jose Mercury News in which some combination of the three is employed. Four future scenarios for the Internet are presented. The author notes that the planning process and tools presented here are to be used by Internet content providers to assist them in developing viable Internet strategies.

    Rivkin, S. R. (1997). Power on both sides now: The critical role of electric utilities in Internet development [On-line]. Available: http://ksgwww.harvard.edu/iip/doeconf/rivkin.html

    The electric utility industry is making probes into providing telecommunications services. In essence, Rivkin writes, the presence of electric service in virtually every home matches precisely the potential universal topology of the Internet. This paper was presented at a Harvard conference and explores the economic incentives for the electric utilities' provision of Internet service into the home.

    Saarinen, L. (1997). WebEc: Economics of Networks [On-line]. Available: http://econwpa.wustl.edu/WebEc/webeczn.html

    This web site is a portion of a larger site devoted to economic resources on the Internet. This site includes links to several of the references in this annotated bibliography. This site is limited but broader in scope than Internet economics.

    Sagawa, P. I. (1997). The balkanization of the Internet. McKinsey Quarterly, 1997(1), 126-139.

    The huge growth in Internet demand, combined with rapid innovation, incomplete standards, fragmented competition, and what Sagawa calls "unrealistic pricing policies," is producing an environment of wrenching and unpredictable change. Sagawa sees users defecting in search of more specialized services, causing a balkanization of the Internet into interconnected network families, each with a distinct user community and differentiated capabilities, and flat pricing will be a thing of the past.

    Salamone, S. & Rendleman, J. (1997, May 12). UUNET: Get off my backbone. CommunicationsWeek (662) [On-line]. Available: http://www.techweb.com/se/directlink.cgi?CWK19970512S0005

    The rules for transport of Internet traffic changed in 1997 (see UUNET, 1997). In order for backbone provider UUNET to "peer" traffic, Internet Service Providers must have a national, diversely routed, dedicated Internet backbone operating at 45 megabits per second or higher, those ISPs must connect to UUNET in at least four geographically dispersed sites at speeds in excess of 45 Mbps. While the major ISPs already comply with those conditions, many smaller ISPs do not.

    Sandberg, J. & Weber, T. E. (1996, December 24). Why the $19.95 Internet fees may not last. Wall Street Journal, p. B1.

    This article questions the flat fee scheme being used by Internet Service Providers and cites industry experts as saying it may be discontinued in 1997. The evidence from the marketplace has yet to support this prediction.

    Sarkar, M. (1997). Internet pricing: A regulatory imperative. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 479-499). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    On the assumption of pending bandwidth scarcity, Sarkar says it is imperative to "develop a pricing system that would serve to effectively ration bandwidth," a common theme in the discussion of Internet economics today. After reviewing the growth of the Internet, the chapter includes a readable review of various Internet pricing alternatives before concluding that a regulatory solution is needed to implement one.

    Schrader, W. L. (1997, January). Why the Internet crash will never happen. Telecommunications 31(1), 25-28.

    Various predictions of imminent Internet collapse (see Metcalfe, 1995) seem to arise from three myths about the Internet: 1) the Internet is not economically viable; 2) Internet growth is unsustainable, and 3) Internet technology does not work.

    Selwyn, L. L. & Laszlo, J. W. (1997, January 22). The effect of Internet use on the nation's telephone network [On-line]. Available: http://www2.itic.org/itic/eti_toc.html

    Economists Selwyn and Laszlo authored this report in response to telco complaints about the negative consequences of Internet traffic on the telephone network (see Bell Atlantic, 1996). This document includes the authors' critique of those RBOC claims. The report states that increased data communications traffic has produced additional revenue for the local phone companies that exceed the costs of accommodating the traffic. This report was funded by the ISP industry.

    Shaw, R. (1997). Internet domain names: Whose domain is this? In B. Kahin & J. Keller (Eds.), Coordinating the Internet (pp. 107-134). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    An Internet domain name is the "word" version of an address that is more easily used by humans than straight IP addresses (e.g., www.ibm.com is also know as 129.34.139.30). Because domain names were assigned on a first come, first served basis, conflict can arise between domain registrations and trademark holders (see the annotation for Kahin & Keller, 1997). Shaw presents a detailed history of the Internet domain name registration process. He then discusses the conflict between trade names and domain names before reviewing proposals for changing the domain name system.

    Shenker, S. (1996). Pricing in computer networks: Reshaping the research agenda. Telecommunications Policy 20(3), 183-201.

    Shenker presents the argument that Internet usage-based charging and flat pricing are two ends of the same continuum. The difference between them is not one of fundamental principle but merely of degree. Hybrids of the two approaches will likely be commonly used in the future.

    Shenker, S. (1995). Service models and pricing policies for an integrated services Internet. In B. Kahin & J. Keller (Eds.), Public access to the Internet (pp. 315-337). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    Integrated services refer to the combination of audio, video, voice and data on the Internet. This combination is expected to a prohibitive amount of bandwidth. Shenker explains how efficiencies can be achieved by varying prices according to quality of service.

    Sichel, W. & Alexander, D. L. (Eds.). (1996). Networks, infrastructure, and the new task for regulation. Ann Arbor, Michigan: University of Michigan Press.

    This collection of papers is not Internet specific, although it does include works of direct relevance to Internet economics including MacKie-Mason and Varian (1996). Other works on general network economics are including. Kenneth Boyer, for example, writes an overview of the key concept of "network externalities," the impact one person's action has another one's use (e.g., of the Internet). The ten papers are all oriented toward network economics.

    Srinagesh, P. (1995, March). Internet cost structures and interconnection agreements [On-line]. Paper Presented at MIT Workshop on Internet Economics. Available: http://www.press.umich.edu/jep/works/SrinCostSt.html.

    A chapter by the same name is also published in Brock (1995) and McKnight and Bailey (1997). See Srinagesh (1997).

    Srinagesh, P. (1997). Internet cost structures and interconnection agreements. In L. W. McKnight & J. P. Bailey, (Eds.), Internet Economics (pp. 121-154). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.

    This book chapter covers the various costs incurred by Internet Service Providers (ISPs) from purchasing connectivity to the Internet to other ISP costs such as customer support. Actual dollar figures for sample cases are cited. This is an excellent introduction to the economics of ISPs and including a history of interconnection agreements on the Internet.

    tele.com: The Web Edition [On-line]. Available: http://www.teledotcom.com/

    tele.com is a new periodical publication from McGraw-Hill. Its first issue is dated April 1996. This magazine purports to covering convergence news, and recent issues have covered issues related to the Internet Services Provider industry heavily

    Telecommunications Industries Analysis Project. (1996, May 10). A snapshot in time: LEC switch investment and price structures for connections to the switch just before the Telecommunications Act of 1996. Boston, MA: Author. Available: http://www.tiap.org/

    This document describes how interconnection issues have been addressed in the U.S., including the current status of interconnection with traditional local exchange carrier (LEC) networks. The objective of this paper is to examine current investments and interconnection pricing structures associated with LEC local switches. Among the data tables presented in the report is one called "Comparison of Traditional Switched Telephone Network Traffic, Switched Internet Use, and Non-Switched Cable TV Use." The report also includes detailed definitions of terms related to regulation of telephony.

    Too cheap to meter? (1996, October 19). Economist, 341(7988), pp. 25-28.

    Various references in this annotated bibliography advocate the position that the Internet can not continue its current system of pricing. Many suggest some form of usage-sensitive pricing. This article contrasts the economic models of telephony and the Internet before summarizing some of the current thinking on pricing models such as those referenced here.

    Turner, J. A. (Ed.). (1996). Internet Economics [Special issue]. Journal of Electronic Publishing [On-line serial]. Available: http://www.press.umich.edu/jep/econTOC.html

    An Internet Economics Workshop was held on March 9 & 10, 1995 at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. The papers presented at that conference were placed on-line, revised, and published in the Journal of Electronic Publishing. Since their publication here, the papers were revised again and are presented in McKnight and Bailey (1997).

    UUNET details peering strategy. (1997). Press release [On-line]. Available: http://www.usa.uu.net/press/peering.html

    UUNET is both an Internet Service Provider and a global Internet backbone provider. UUNET announced in May 1997 that it would no longer allow freely carry traffic from ISPs with limited bandwidth of their own (see Salamone & Rendleman, 1997). This action is seen as forcing more rapid consolidation of smaller providers in the ISP industry.

    Varian, H. R. (1997a). The economics of the Internet, information goods, intellectual property and related issues [On-line]. Available: http://www.sims.berkeley.edu/resources/infoecon/

    Varian is Dean of the new School of Information Management and Systems at the University of California at Berkeley. This web site includes links to references related to the economics of information. Categories include commerce, intranets, network economies, policy, and law and pricing.

    Varian, H. R. (1997b). Network economics [On-line]. University of California Berkeley School of Information Management and Systems. Available: http://www.sims.berkeley.edu/resources/infoecon/Networks.html

    This web site includes links to on-line resources related to network (not just Internet) economics. Sections include general sites, network externalities, interconnection, and technical specifications & services.

    Varian, H. R. (1996). Economic issues facing the Internet [On-line]. Available: ftp://alfred.sims.berkeley.edu/pub/Papers/econ-issues-internet.html

    This is an excellent overview of issues related to Internet economics as of 1996. It includes a history of the Internet including the author's speculation on user-oriented innovations coming to the Internet such as content filtering technologies and other more economics-based predictions. See Institute for Information Studies (1997).

    Vickrey, W. S. (1981). Local telephone costs and the design of rate structure: An innovative view. Mimeo.

    Although not a recent cite nor one specific to the Internet, this author's work is relevant to Internet economics for his theories on congestion pricing often applied to transportation. Vickrey won the 1996 Nobel prize for economics and is known among economists as the "father of congestion pricing." This particular citation was taken from Sarkar (1997). This is not to be confused with Downs' law (named after economist Anthony Downs): drivers will always emerge to clog whatever free capacity you give them (from Marshall, 1996).

    Villasis, S. J. (1996). An optimal pricing mechanism for Internet's end-users. Unpublished master's thesis, University of Idaho, Moscow, Idaho [On-line]. Available: http://socserv2.socsci.mcmaster.ca/~econ/gs/villasis/stuff/svs-thes.pdf

    Although not authored by one of the more recognized authorities on Internet economics, this useful document includes a reference list related to Internet pricing including a glossary of terms. The references vary from and are more dated than those that appear in the present bibliography, so Villasis is a nice complement to the present work.

    Ward, L. (1997). Community network technology. In A. M. Cohill & A. L. Kavanaugh (Eds.), Community networks: Lessons from Blacksburg, Virginia (pp. 159-234), Boston: Artech House.

    This unique paper details Internet architecture as it relates to the implementation of a local Internet service like the Blacksburg Electronic Village. This is an applied look at the costs of the Internet from the network user side.

    Wenders, J. T. & Taylor, L. D. (1976). Experiments in seasonal time-of-day pricing of electricity to residential users. The Bell Journal of Economics, 7(2), 531-552.

    To meet utility load demands, electric utilities have tried varying the price of service by time-of-day. A number of experiments designed to test the feasibility of seasonal-time-of-day pricing were underway at the time of this publication. This paper addresses some of the problems that these experiments would encounter, and describes a methodology for measuring the welfare benefits and costs from such pricing schemes. Some believe that Internet congestion today can and should be handled by similar means. (The The Bell Journal of Economics is now the The Rand Journal of Economics.)

    Werbach, K. (1997. March). Digital tornado: The Internet and telecommunications policy. United States: Federal Communications Commission Office of Plans and Policy. Available: http://www.fcc.gov/Bureaus/OPP/working_papers/oppwp29pdf.html

    This FCC staff working paper written by Kevin Werbach, Counsel for New Technology Policy, is clearly one of the most current and useful references available on the subject at the time of its publication. Digital Tornado is a fairly extensive assessment of the questions the Internet poses for traditional communications policy. A central theme is that the FCC and other government agencies should seek to limit regulation of Internet services. Werbach provides an analytical framework to understanding the forces driving Internet growth and describes the Internet's development and architecture. The paper addresses three primary areas: 1) category difficulties (policy and legal questions arising from Internet-based services not fitting easily into the existing classifications for communications services under federal law or FCC regulations); 2) pricing and usage (policy questions arising from the economics of Internet access including the local telco cliams that current Internet pricing structures result in network congestion, and arguments by Internet Service Providers that telephone companies have not upgraded their networks to facilitate efficient transport of data services); and 3) availability of bandwidth (regulatory and technical issues affecting the deployment of high speed technologies including the implications for the Internet of the FCC's role in promoting universal service).

    Why the Internet failed to collapse (1997, April 19). Economist, 343(8013), p. 63.

    This article is a response to the expected Internet collapse of 1996 spawned by Metcalfe (1995). The article explains why the Internet is outperforming the naysayers who predicted it could not keep up with demand. Data are cited showing Internet response time improving 15% per year and network instability problems down nearly two-thirds in the previous six months.

    Zakon, R. H. (1997). Hobbes' Internet Timeline v3.0 [On-line]. Available: http://info.isoc.org/guest/zakon/Internet/History/HIT.html

    This is another oft-cited reference on Internet history and growth. It includes data on the growth of various network hosts, WWW servers, Usenet sites, etc. As of this writing, the timeline continues to be updated periodically.

    © 1997 by Dr. Bruce C. Klopfenstein Counter
    post"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate b8" 1a+1/9ntry((55ba@ Dialog: Long Boom or Slow Bust? postXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate (7 +5ntry(%hͺQlgho] a@Qurl +http://www.databank.it/dbc/fair/page07.htmmime text/htmlhvrsdata THE EUROPEAN INFORMATION SOCIETY AT THE CROSSROADS
    HOME PAGE FAIR

    THE EUROPEAN INFORMATION SOCIETY
    AT THE CROSSROADS

    (FAIR Annual Report, 1997)

    The central concern of 1997 FAIR Report is that the pace of ICT technical innovation in the supply structure and the implementation of a regulatory framework moving towards increased competition and liberalisation are proceeding more rapidly than other necessary social and economic changes.

     The way forward to the European Information Society involves the transformation of the socio-economic system and the evolution of social and economic processes at the societal, firm and organisational, and individual levels. These processes are interlocked in an interdependent system where the impact of technical innovation is only one of several crucial components.

     In Europe there are elements of structural rigidity in the macro-economic and institutional systems and these are constraining the ability to incorporate and exploit innovations in ICTs. At the firm and individual levels, the still limited penetration of ICTs means that smaller companies and individuals are at an early phase on the learning curve that ultimately will enable them to use the new services effectively.

     At the same time, the diffusion of ICTs is a cumulative process which is putting increasing pressure on the barriers to change. Awareness of the potential socio-economic benefits and pitfalls of the ‘networked society’ has improved substantially over the past year thanks to the success of the Internet. But the evidence of the socio-economic impacts of advanced communication adoption continues to be uneven and partial across Europe.

     This Report shows that there are some pioneering companies or sectors, and that some social groups and local communities are very involved in experimentation. However, there are others who are at risk of being left behind. This is the reason that the way forward to the European Information Society is at a cross-roads.

     The next two or three years will be crucial for Europe. The building blocks of the new information infrastructures will be put in place and this could provide an opportunity for the wide availability and greater accessibility of new services creating a favourable environment for people to sample and exploit the innovations in ICTs.

     The full impact of this self-reinforcing mechanism on the economy and society will take time to be felt - probably not until after the year 2000. If this development process does not start soon it is likely that Europe will not be able to close the gap with other fast-moving societies and especially the United States.



    Top page
    posthXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXcate %hht 2'K+9R8O;6H+7A6?Ԇf2Baj+F(E%1U:'=c+=g,^Z+BAGbLr8+t{n5wRa+U=TV~բegM+TndLUrOLIt+dcG2 Aд+? A.ӭղb Y@+BsS G+E\$JߨS cH+H771,1b ?ʹJ+JA5@zim2r ng)+M :gP#H WȯY+ SV d+ B%ALhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/digital/document.htmlcat Hhf@Lh+{9z3{6+LkKpS,Vȳ埴+LUKR?yUr"+6|2 A+bSɴ+1<؅ Y8#+!1G+{E;+FQMv{<Ӳ^?>+?{36ү}C+ CEN+ *b (l9u+WR)x+*yW:}g+ ]ߋr+x1y+#>8ny= +  ں,79#ȴ+#,l+w;&-Ċ$+$ a 'Ay%+%.\ǠMp'+':{LP.\r+-6M?s`6+9@?gvܓ#7M+<DChyhh̳+W:9[dlKֳ]+`:9mbXzm;n\+jGCF9 9~q&+oMLmC=Ft6M+u<;o0Kz@޴+;KbuP+=7<1emq\H+FE7LV7t 2'K+9R8O;6H+7A6?Ԇf2Baj+F(E%1U:'=c+=g,^Z+BAGbLr8+t{n5wRa+U=TV~բegM+TndLUrOLIt+dcG2 Aд+? A.ӭղb Y@+BsS G+E\$JߨS cH+H771,1b ?ʹJ+JA5@zim2r ng)+M :gP#H WȯY+ SV d+ B%ALhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/digital/document.htmlcat Hhf@Lh+{9z3{6+LkKpS,Vȳ埴+LUKR?yUr"+6|2 A+bSɴ+1<؅ Y8#+!1G+{E;+FQMv{<Ӳ^?>+?{36ү}C+ CEN+ *b (l9u+WR)x+*yW:}g+ ]ߋr+x1y+#>8ny= +  ں,79#ȴ+#,l+w;&-Ċ$+$ a 'Ay%+%.\ǠMp'+':{LP.\r+-6M?s`6+9@?gvܓ#7M+<DChyhh̳+W:9[dlKֳ]+`:9mbXzm;n\+jGCF9 9~q&+oMLmC=Ft6M+u<;o0Kz@޴+;KbuP+=7<1emq\H+FE7LV7t 2'K+9R8O;6H+7A6?Ԇf2Baj+F(E%1U:'=c+=g,^Z+BAGbLr8+t{n5wRa+U=TV~բegM+TndLUrOLIt+dcG2 Aд+? A.ӭղb Y@+BsS G+E\$JߨS cH+H771,1b ?ʹJ+JA5@zim2r ng)+M :gP#H WȯY+ SV d+ B%ALhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/digital/document.htmlcat Hhf@Lh+{9z3{6+LkKpS,Vȳ埴+LUKR?yUr"+6|2 A+bSɴ+1<؅ Y8#+!1G+{E;+FQMv{<Ӳ^?>+?{36ү}C+ CEN+ *b (l9u+WR)x+*yW:}g+ ]ߋr+x1y+#>8ny= +  ں,79#ȴ+#,l+w;&-Ċ$+$ a 'Ay%+%.\ǠMp'+':{LP.\r+-6M?s`6+9@?gvܓ#7M+<DChyhh̳+W:9[dlKֳ]+`:9mbXzm;n\+jGCF9 9~q&+oMLmC=Ft6M+u<;o0Kz@޴+;KbuP+=7<1emq\H+FE7LV7t 2'K+9R8O;6H+7A6?Ԇf2Baj+F(E%1U:'=c+=g,^Z+BAGbLr8+t{n5wRa+U=TV~բegM+TndLUrOLIt+dcG2 Aд+? A.ӭղb Y@+BsS G+E\$JߨS cH+H771,1b ?ʹJ+JA5@zim2r ng)+M :gP#H WȯY+ SV d+ B%ALhttp://www.hoechst-forum.uni-muenchen.de/digital/document.html